Arm: Fix thumb2 PLT branch offsets.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
463 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464 This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
465 fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
466 section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
467 error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
468 several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
469 section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
470 sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
471
472 @smallexample
473 MEMORY @{
474 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
475 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
476 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 @}
478 SECTIONS @{
479 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
480 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
481 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 @}
483
484 with input sections:
485 .data.1: size 8
486 .data.2: size 0x10
487 .data.3: size 4
488
489 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
490 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
491 @end smallexample
492
493 This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
494 the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
495
496 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
497 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498 This option enables warnings when
499 @code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
500 matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
501 discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
502 output region.
503
504 @cindex entry point, from command line
505 @kindex -e @var{entry}
506 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
507 @item -e @var{entry}
508 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
509 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
510 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
511 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
512 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
513 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
514 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
515 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
516
517 @kindex --exclude-libs
518 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
519 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
520 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
521 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
522 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
523 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
524 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
525 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
526 be treated as hidden.
527
528 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
529 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
530 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
531 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
532 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
533 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
534 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
535 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
536 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
537 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
538 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
539 regardless of this option.
540
541 @cindex dynamic symbol table
542 @kindex -E
543 @kindex --export-dynamic
544 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
545 @item -E
546 @itemx --export-dynamic
547 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
548 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
549 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
550 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
551 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
552
553 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
554 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
555 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
556 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
557
558 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
559 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
560 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
561 linking the program itself.
562
563 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
564 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
565 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
566
567 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
568 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
569 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
570
571 @ifclear SingleFormat
572 @cindex big-endian objects
573 @cindex endianness
574 @kindex -EB
575 @item -EB
576 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
577
578 @cindex little-endian objects
579 @kindex -EL
580 @item -EL
581 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
582 @end ifclear
583
584 @kindex -f @var{name}
585 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
586 @item -f @var{name}
587 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
589 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
590 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
591 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
595 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
596 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
597 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
598 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
599 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
600 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
601 machine-specific performance.
602
603 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
604 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
605
606 @kindex -F @var{name}
607 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
608 @item -F @var{name}
609 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
610 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
611 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
612 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
613 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
614
615 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
616 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
617 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
618 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
619 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
620 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
621 @var{name}.
622
623 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
624 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
625 object files.
626 @ifclear SingleFormat
627 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
628 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
629 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
630 environment variable.
631 @end ifclear
632 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
633 creating an ELF shared object.
634
635 @cindex finalization function
636 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
637 @item -fini=@var{name}
638 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
639 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
640 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
641 the function to call.
642
643 @kindex -g
644 @item -g
645 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
646
647 @kindex -G @var{value}
648 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
649 @cindex object size
650 @item -G @var{value}
651 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
652 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
653 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
654 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
655 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
656
657 @cindex runtime library name
658 @kindex -h @var{name}
659 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
660 @item -h @var{name}
661 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
662 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
663 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
664 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
665 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
666 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
667
668 @kindex -i
669 @cindex incremental link
670 @item -i
671 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
672
673 @cindex initialization function
674 @kindex -init=@var{name}
675 @item -init=@var{name}
676 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
677 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
678 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
679 function to call.
680
681 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
682 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
683 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
684 @item -l @var{namespec}
685 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
686 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
687 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
688 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
689 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
690 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
691
692 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
693 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
694 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
695 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
696 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
697 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
698 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
699 @var{filename}.
700
701 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
702 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
703 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
704 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
705 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
706 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
707
708 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
709 archives multiple times.
710
711 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
712
713 @ifset GENERIC
714 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
715 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
716 behaviour of the AIX linker.
717 @end ifset
718
719 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
720 @kindex -L @var{dir}
721 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
722 @item -L @var{searchdir}
723 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
724 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
725 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
726 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
727 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
728 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
729 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
730 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
731 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
732 option is specified.
733
734 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
735 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
736 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
737
738 @ifset UsesEnvVars
739 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
740 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
741 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
742 @end ifset
743
744 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
745 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
746 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
747
748 @cindex emulation
749 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
750 @item -m @var{emulation}
751 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
752 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
753
754 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
755 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
756
757 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
758 configured.
759
760 @cindex link map
761 @kindex -M
762 @kindex --print-map
763 @item -M
764 @itemx --print-map
765 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
766 information about the link, including the following:
767
768 @itemize @bullet
769 @item
770 Where object files are mapped into memory.
771 @item
772 How common symbols are allocated.
773 @item
774 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
775 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
776 @item
777 The values assigned to symbols.
778
779 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
780 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
781 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
782 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
783 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
784 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
785 linker script containing:
786
787 @smallexample
788 foo = 1
789 foo = foo * 4
790 foo = foo + 8
791 @end smallexample
792
793 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
794 option is used:
795
796 @smallexample
797 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
798 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
800 @end smallexample
801
802 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
803 scripts.
804
805 @item
806 How GNU properties are merged.
807
808 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
809 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
810 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
811
812 @smallexample
813 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
814 @end smallexample
815
816 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
817 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
818 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
819
820 @smallexample
821 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
822 @end smallexample
823
824 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
825 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
826 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
827 @end itemize
828
829 @cindex link map discarded
830 @kindex --print-map-discarded
831 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
832 @item --print-map-discarded
833 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
834 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
835 in the link map. Enabled by default.
836
837 @kindex -n
838 @cindex read-only text
839 @cindex NMAGIC
840 @kindex --nmagic
841 @item -n
842 @itemx --nmagic
843 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
844 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
845 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
846
847 @kindex -N
848 @kindex --omagic
849 @cindex read/write from cmd line
850 @cindex OMAGIC
851 @item -N
852 @itemx --omagic
853 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
854 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
855 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
856 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
857 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
858 specification published by Microsoft.
859
860 @kindex --no-omagic
861 @cindex OMAGIC
862 @item --no-omagic
863 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
864 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
865 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
866 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
867
868 @kindex -o @var{output}
869 @kindex --output=@var{output}
870 @cindex naming the output file
871 @item -o @var{output}
872 @itemx --output=@var{output}
873 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
874 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
875 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
876
877 @kindex -O @var{level}
878 @cindex generating optimized output
879 @item -O @var{level}
880 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
881 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
882 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
883 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
884 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
885 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
886 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
887
888 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
889 @item -plugin @var{name}
890 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
891 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
892 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
893 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
894 wish.
895
896 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
897 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
898 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
899 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
900 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
901 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
902 just copy in the newest one.
903
904 @kindex --push-state
905 @cindex push state governing input file handling
906 @item --push-state
907 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
908 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
909 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
910
911 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
912 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
913 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
914 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
915 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
916 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
917
918 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
919 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
920 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
921 something as follows:
922
923 @smallexample
924 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
925 @end smallexample
926
927 @kindex --pop-state
928 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
929 @item --pop-state
930 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
931 flags governing input file handling.
932
933 @kindex -q
934 @kindex --emit-relocs
935 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
936 @item -q
937 @itemx --emit-relocs
938 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
939 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
940 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
941 in larger executables.
942
943 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
944
945 @kindex --force-dynamic
946 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
947 @item --force-dynamic
948 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
949 to VxWorks targets.
950
951 @cindex partial link
952 @cindex relocatable output
953 @kindex -r
954 @kindex --relocatable
955 @item -r
956 @itemx --relocatable
957 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
958 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
959 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
960 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
961 @code{OMAGIC}.
962 @c ; see @option{-N}.
963 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
964 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
965 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
966
967 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
968 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
969 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
970 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
971 with input files in other formats at all.
972
973 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
974
975 @kindex -R @var{file}
976 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
977 @cindex symbol-only input
978 @item -R @var{filename}
979 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
980 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
981 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
982 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
983 programs. You may use this option more than once.
984
985 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
986 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
987 the @option{-rpath} option.
988
989 @kindex -s
990 @kindex --strip-all
991 @cindex strip all symbols
992 @item -s
993 @itemx --strip-all
994 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
995
996 @kindex -S
997 @kindex --strip-debug
998 @cindex strip debugger symbols
999 @item -S
1000 @itemx --strip-debug
1001 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1002
1003 @kindex --strip-discarded
1004 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
1005 @item --strip-discarded
1006 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
1007 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1008 Enabled by default.
1009
1010 @kindex -t
1011 @kindex --trace
1012 @cindex input files, displaying
1013 @item -t
1014 @itemx --trace
1015 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1016 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1017 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1018 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1019 a linker bug report.
1020
1021 @kindex -T @var{script}
1022 @kindex --script=@var{script}
1023 @cindex script files
1024 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
1025 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1026 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1027 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1028 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1029 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1030 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1031 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1032 options accumulate.
1033
1034 @kindex -dT @var{script}
1035 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1036 @cindex script files
1037 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1038 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1039 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1040
1041 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1042 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1043 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1044 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1045 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1046 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1047 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1048 @samp{gcc}).
1049
1050 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1051 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1052 @cindex undefined symbol
1053 @item -u @var{symbol}
1054 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1055 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1056 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1057 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1058 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1059 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1060
1061 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1062 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1063 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1064 instead.
1065
1066 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1067 @cindex symbols, require defined
1068 @cindex defined symbol
1069 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1070 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1071 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1072 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1073 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1074 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1075 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1076
1077 @kindex -Ur
1078 @cindex constructors
1079 @item -Ur
1080 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1081 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1082 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1083 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1084 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1085 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1086 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1087 @samp{-r} for the others.
1088
1089 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1090 @cindex orphan sections
1091 @cindex sections, orphan
1092 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1093 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1094 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1095
1096 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1097
1098 @table @code
1099 @item place
1100 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1101 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1102 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1103
1104 @item discard
1105 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1106 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1107
1108 @item warn
1109 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1110 issue a warning.
1111
1112 @item error
1113 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1114 @end table
1115
1116 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1117
1118 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1119 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1121 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1122 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1123 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1124 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1125 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1126 in a linker script.
1127
1128 @kindex -v
1129 @kindex -V
1130 @kindex --version
1131 @cindex version
1132 @item -v
1133 @itemx --version
1134 @itemx -V
1135 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1136 lists the supported emulations.
1137
1138 @kindex -x
1139 @kindex --discard-all
1140 @cindex deleting local symbols
1141 @item -x
1142 @itemx --discard-all
1143 Delete all local symbols.
1144
1145 @kindex -X
1146 @kindex --discard-locals
1147 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1148 @item -X
1149 @itemx --discard-locals
1150 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1151 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1152 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1153
1154 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1155 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1156 @cindex symbol tracing
1157 @item -y @var{symbol}
1158 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1159 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1160 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1161 to prepend an underscore.
1162
1163 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1164 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1165
1166 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1167 @item -Y @var{path}
1168 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1169 for Solaris compatibility.
1170
1171 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1172 @item -z @var{keyword}
1173 The recognized keywords are:
1174 @table @samp
1175
1176 @item bndplt
1177 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1178
1179 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1180 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1181 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1182 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1183 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1184 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1185 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1186 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1187 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1188 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1189 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1190
1191 @item cet-report=none
1192 @itemx cet-report=warning
1193 @itemx cet-report=error
1194 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1195 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1196 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1197 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1198 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1199 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1200 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1201 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1202 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1203 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1204 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1205
1206 @item combreloc
1207 @itemx nocombreloc
1208 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1209 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1210
1211 @item common
1212 @itemx nocommon
1213 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1214 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1215
1216 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1217 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1218 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1219 using pages of this size.
1220
1221 @item defs
1222 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1223 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1224 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1225
1226 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1227 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1228 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1229 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1230 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1231 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1232 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1233 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1234 these options.
1235
1236 @item execstack
1237 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1238
1239 @item global
1240 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1241 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1242 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1243
1244 @item globalaudit
1245 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1246 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1247 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1248 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1249 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1250 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1251
1252 @item ibtplt
1253 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1254 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1255
1256 @item ibt
1257 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1258 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1259 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1260
1261 @item initfirst
1262 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1263 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1264 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1265 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1266 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1267 objects.
1268
1269 @item interpose
1270 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1271 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1272 libraries not so marked.
1273
1274 @item lazy
1275 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1276 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1277 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1278 Lazy binding is the default.
1279
1280 @item loadfltr
1281 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1282
1283 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1284 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1285
1286 @item muldefs
1287 Allow multiple definitions.
1288
1289 @item nocopyreloc
1290 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1291 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1292
1293 @item nodefaultlib
1294 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1295 should ignore any default library search paths.
1296
1297 @item nodelete
1298 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1299
1300 @item nodlopen
1301 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1302
1303 @item nodump
1304 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1305
1306 @item noexecstack
1307 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1308
1309 @item noextern-protected-data
1310 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1311 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1312 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1313 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1314 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1315 i386 and x86-64.
1316
1317 @item noreloc-overflow
1318 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1319 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1320 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1321
1322 @item now
1323 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1324 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1325 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1326 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1327 called.
1328
1329 @item origin
1330 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1331
1332 @item relro
1333 @itemx norelro
1334 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1335 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1336 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1337 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1338 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1339
1340 @item separate-code
1341 @itemx noseparate-code
1342 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1343 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1344 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1345 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1346
1347 @item shstk
1348 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1349 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1350 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1351
1352 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1353 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1354 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1355 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1356
1357 @item text
1358 @itemx notext
1359 @itemx textoff
1360 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1361 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1362 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1363
1364 @item undefs
1365 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1366 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1367 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1368
1369 @end table
1370
1371 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1372
1373 @kindex -(
1374 @cindex groups of archives
1375 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1376 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1377 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1378 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1379
1380 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1381 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1382 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1383 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1384 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1385 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1386 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1387 resolved.
1388
1389 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1390 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1391 more archives.
1392
1393 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1394 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1395 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1396 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1397 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1398 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1399 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1400 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1401 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1402 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1403 restore the old behaviour.
1404
1405 @kindex --as-needed
1406 @kindex --no-as-needed
1407 @item --as-needed
1408 @itemx --no-as-needed
1409 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1410 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1411 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1412 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1413 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1414 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1415 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1416 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1417 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1418 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1419 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1420 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1421 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1422
1423 @kindex --add-needed
1424 @kindex --no-add-needed
1425 @item --add-needed
1426 @itemx --no-add-needed
1427 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1428 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1429 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1430 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1431
1432 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1433 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1434 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1435
1436 @kindex -Bdynamic
1437 @kindex -dy
1438 @kindex -call_shared
1439 @item -Bdynamic
1440 @itemx -dy
1441 @itemx -call_shared
1442 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1443 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1444 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1445 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1446 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1447 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1448
1449 @kindex -Bgroup
1450 @item -Bgroup
1451 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1452 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1453 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1454 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1455 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1456
1457 @kindex -Bstatic
1458 @kindex -dn
1459 @kindex -non_shared
1460 @kindex -static
1461 @item -Bstatic
1462 @itemx -dn
1463 @itemx -non_shared
1464 @itemx -static
1465 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1466 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1467 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1468 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1469 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1470 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1471 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1472 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1473 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1474 libraries.
1475
1476 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1477 @item -Bsymbolic
1478 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1479 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1480 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1481 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1482 platforms which support shared libraries.
1483
1484 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1485 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1486 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1487 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1488 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1489 libraries.
1490
1491 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1492 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1494 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1495 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1496 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1497 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1498 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1499 which support shared libraries.
1500
1501 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1502 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1503
1504 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1505 @item --dynamic-list-data
1506 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1507
1508 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1509 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1511 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1512
1513 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1514 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1516
1517 @kindex --check-sections
1518 @kindex --no-check-sections
1519 @item --check-sections
1520 @itemx --no-check-sections
1521 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1522 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1523 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1524 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1525 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1526 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1527 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1528 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1529 option.
1530
1531 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1532 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1533 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1534 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1535 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1536 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1537 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1538 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1539 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1540 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1541 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1542 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1543
1544 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1545 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1546 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1547 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1548 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1549 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1550 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1551 symbols.
1552
1553 @cindex cross reference table
1554 @kindex --cref
1555 @item --cref
1556 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1557 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1558 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1559
1560 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1561 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1562 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1563 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1564 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1565 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1566 symbol are listed.
1567
1568 @cindex common allocation
1569 @kindex --no-define-common
1570 @item --no-define-common
1571 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1572 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1573 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1574
1575 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1576 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1577 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1578 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1579 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1580 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1581 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1582 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1583 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1584 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1585
1586 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1587 @cindex section groups
1588 @cindex COMDAT
1589 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1590 @item --force-group-allocation
1591 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1592 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1593 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1594 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1595 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1596 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1597
1598 @cindex symbols, from command line
1599 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1600 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1601 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1602 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1603 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1604 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1605 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1606 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1607 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1608 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1609 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1610 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1611
1612 @cindex demangling, from command line
1613 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1614 @kindex --no-demangle
1615 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1616 @itemx --no-demangle
1617 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1618 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1619 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1620 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1621 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1622 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1623 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1624 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1625 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1626
1627 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1628 @kindex -I@var{file}
1629 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1630 @item -I@var{file}
1631 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1632 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1633 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1634 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1635 doing.
1636
1637 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1638 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1639 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1640 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1641 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1642 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1643
1644 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1645 @item --embedded-relocs
1646 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1647 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1648 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1649 targets.
1650
1651 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1652 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1654 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1655
1656 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1657 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1658 @item --fatal-warnings
1659 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1660 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1661 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1662
1663 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1664 @item --force-exe-suffix
1665 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1666
1667 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1668 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1669 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1670 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1671 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1672 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1673
1674 @kindex --gc-sections
1675 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1676 @cindex garbage collection
1677 @item --gc-sections
1678 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1679 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1680 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1681 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1682 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1683 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1684 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1685
1686 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1687 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1688 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1689 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1690 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1691 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1692 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1693 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1694 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1695 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1696
1697 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1698 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1699 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1700 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1701 command in the linker script.
1702
1703 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1704 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1705 @cindex garbage collection
1706 @item --print-gc-sections
1707 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1708 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1709 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1710 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1711 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1712 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1713 line.
1714
1715 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1716 @cindex garbage collection
1717 @item --gc-keep-exported
1718 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1719 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1720 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1721 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1722 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1723 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1724 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1725 ELF format targets.
1726
1727 @kindex --print-output-format
1728 @cindex output format
1729 @item --print-output-format
1730 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1731 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1732 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1733
1734 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1735 @cindex memory usage
1736 @item --print-memory-usage
1737 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1738 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1739 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1740 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1741 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1742
1743 @smallexample
1744 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1745 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1746 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1747 @end smallexample
1748
1749 @cindex help
1750 @cindex usage
1751 @kindex --help
1752 @item --help
1753 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1754
1755 @kindex --target-help
1756 @item --target-help
1757 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1758
1759 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1760 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1762 @option{-M} option, above.
1763
1764 @cindex memory usage
1765 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1766 @item --no-keep-memory
1767 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1768 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1769 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1770 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1771 while linking a large executable.
1772
1773 @kindex --no-undefined
1774 @kindex -z defs
1775 @kindex -z undefs
1776 @item --no-undefined
1777 @itemx -z defs
1778 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1779 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1780 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1781 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1782 libraries being linked in.
1783
1784 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1785
1786 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1787 @kindex -z muldefs
1788 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1789 @itemx -z muldefs
1790 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1791 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1792 first definition will be used.
1793
1794 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1795 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1796 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1797 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1798 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1799 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1800 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1801 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1802 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1803
1804 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1805 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1806 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1807 a shared library.
1808
1809 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1810 libraries specified at link time are that:
1811
1812 @itemize @bullet
1813 @item
1814 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1815 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1816 resolvable at load time.
1817 @item
1818 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1819 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1820
1821 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1822 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1823 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1824 appropriate memset function.
1825 @end itemize
1826
1827 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1828 @item --no-undefined-version
1829 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1830 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1831 will be issued instead.
1832
1833 @kindex --default-symver
1834 @item --default-symver
1835 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1836 exported symbols.
1837
1838 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1839 @item --default-imported-symver
1840 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1841 imported symbols.
1842
1843 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1844 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1845 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1846 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1847 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1848 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1849 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1850 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1851 inappropriate.
1852
1853 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1854 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1856 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1857
1858 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1859 @item --no-whole-archive
1860 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1861 archive files.
1862
1863 @cindex output file after errors
1864 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1865 @item --noinhibit-exec
1866 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1867 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1868 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1869 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1870
1871 @kindex -nostdlib
1872 @item -nostdlib
1873 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1874 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1875 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1876
1877 @ifclear SingleFormat
1878 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1879 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1881 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1882 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1883 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1884 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1885 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1886 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1887 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1888 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1889 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1890 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1891 @end ifclear
1892
1893 @kindex --out-implib
1894 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1895 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1896 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1897 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1898 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1899 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1900 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1901 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1902
1903 @kindex -pie
1904 @kindex --pic-executable
1905 @item -pie
1906 @itemx --pic-executable
1907 @cindex position independent executables
1908 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1909 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1910 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1911 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1912 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1913 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1914
1915 @kindex -qmagic
1916 @item -qmagic
1917 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1918
1919 @kindex -Qy
1920 @item -Qy
1921 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1922
1923 @kindex --relax
1924 @cindex synthesizing linker
1925 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1926 @cindex --no-relax
1927 @item --relax
1928 @itemx --no-relax
1929 An option with machine dependent effects.
1930 @ifset GENERIC
1931 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1932 @end ifset
1933 @ifset H8300
1934 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1935 @end ifset
1936 @ifset XTENSA
1937 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1938 @end ifset
1939 @ifset M68HC11
1940 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1941 @end ifset
1942 @ifset NIOSII
1943 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1944 @end ifset
1945 @ifset POWERPC
1946 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1947 @end ifset
1948
1949 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1950 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1951 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1952 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1953 instructions, and combining constant values.
1954
1955 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1956 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1957 @ifset GENERIC
1958 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1959 family of processors.
1960 @end ifset
1961
1962 @ifset GENERIC
1963 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1964 but ignored.
1965 @end ifset
1966
1967 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1968 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1969
1970 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1971 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1972 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1973 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1974 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1976 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1977 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1978 @ifset GENERIC
1979 (such as VxWorks)
1980 @end ifset
1981 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1982 run-time memory.
1983
1984 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1985 or symbols needed for relocations.
1986
1987 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1988 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1989
1990 @ifset GENERIC
1991 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1992 @cindex runtime library search path
1993 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1994 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1995 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1996 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1997 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1998
1999 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2000 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2001 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2002 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2003 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2004
2005 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2006 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2007 is defined.
2008
2009 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2010 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2011 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2012 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2013 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2014 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2015 file systems.
2016
2017 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2018 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2019 the @option{-rpath} option.
2020 @end ifset
2021
2022 @ifset GENERIC
2023 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
2024 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2025 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2027 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2028 of the input files.
2029
2030 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2031 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2032 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2033 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2034 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2035 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2036 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2037 appearing multiple times.
2038
2039 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2040 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2041 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2042 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2043 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2044
2045 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2046 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2047 supported.
2048
2049 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2050 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2051 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2052 runtime linker would do.
2053
2054 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2055 libraries:
2056
2057 @enumerate
2058 @item
2059 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2060 @item
2061 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2062 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2063 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2064 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2065 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2066 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2067 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2068 @item
2069 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2070 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2071 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2072 @item
2073 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2074 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2075 @item
2076 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2077 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2078 @item
2079 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2080 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2081 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2082 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2083 @item
2084 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2085 @item
2086 For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2087 exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2088 to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2089 defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2090 configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2091 @item
2092 For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2093 the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2094 header file.
2095 @item
2096 Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2097 linker script being used.
2098 @end enumerate
2099
2100 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2101 warning and continue with the link.
2102 @end ifset
2103
2104 @kindex -shared
2105 @kindex -Bshareable
2106 @item -shared
2107 @itemx -Bshareable
2108 @cindex shared libraries
2109 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2110 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2111 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2112 undefined symbols in the link.
2113
2114 @kindex --sort-common
2115 @item --sort-common
2116 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2117 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2118 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2119 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2120 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2121 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2122 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2123 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2124
2125 @kindex --sort-section=name
2126 @item --sort-section=name
2127 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2128 patterns in the linker script.
2129
2130 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2131 @item --sort-section=alignment
2132 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2133 patterns in the linker script.
2134
2135 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2136 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2137 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2138 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2139 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2140
2141 @kindex --split-by-file
2142 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2143 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2144 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2145 size of 1 if not given.
2146
2147 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2148 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2149 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2150 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2151 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2152 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2153 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2154 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2155 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2156 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2157 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2158 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2159
2160 @kindex --stats
2161 @item --stats
2162 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2163 as execution time and memory usage.
2164
2165 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2166 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2167 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2168 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2169 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2170
2171 @kindex --task-link
2172 @item --task-link
2173 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2174 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2175
2176 @kindex --traditional-format
2177 @cindex traditional format
2178 @item --traditional-format
2179 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2180 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2181 use the traditional format instead.
2182
2183 @cindex dbx
2184 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2185 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2186 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2187 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2188 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2189 combine duplicate entries.
2190
2191 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2192 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2194 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2195 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2196 line.
2197 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2198 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2199 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2200 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2201 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2202
2203 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2204 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2205 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2206 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2207 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2208 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2209 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2210 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2211 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2212
2213 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2214 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2216 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2217 byte of the text segment.
2218
2219 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2220 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2222 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2223 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2224 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2225
2226 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2227 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2229 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2230 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2231
2232 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2233 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2234 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2235 values for @samp{method}:
2236
2237 @table @samp
2238 @item ignore-all
2239 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2240
2241 @item report-all
2242 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2243
2244 @item ignore-in-object-files
2245 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2246 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2247
2248 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2249 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2250 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2251 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2252 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2253 command line.
2254 @end table
2255
2256 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2257 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2258
2259 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2260 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2261 can change this to a warning.
2262
2263 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2264 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265 @item --dll-verbose
2266 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2267 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2268 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2269 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2270 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2271
2272 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2273 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2274 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2275 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2276 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2277 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2278 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2279 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2280 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2281 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2282 @xref{WIN32}.
2283
2284 @kindex --warn-common
2285 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2286 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2287 @item --warn-common
2288 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2289 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2290 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2291 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2292 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2293 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2294
2295 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2296
2297 @table @samp
2298 @item int i = 1;
2299 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2300 file.
2301
2302 @item extern int i;
2303 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2304 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2305 variable somewhere.
2306
2307 @item int i;
2308 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2309 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2310 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2311 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2312 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2313 a definition of the same variable.
2314 @end table
2315
2316 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2317 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2318 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2319 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2320 a common symbol.
2321
2322 @enumerate
2323 @item
2324 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2325 definition for the symbol.
2326 @smallexample
2327 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2328 overridden by definition
2329 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2330 @end smallexample
2331
2332 @item
2333 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2334 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2335 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2336 @smallexample
2337 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2338 overriding common
2339 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2340 @end smallexample
2341
2342 @item
2343 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2344 @smallexample
2345 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2346 of `@var{symbol}'
2347 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2348 @end smallexample
2349
2350 @item
2351 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2352 @smallexample
2353 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2354 overridden by larger common
2355 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2356 @end smallexample
2357
2358 @item
2359 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2360 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2361 encountered in a different order.
2362 @smallexample
2363 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2364 overriding smaller common
2365 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2366 @end smallexample
2367 @end enumerate
2368
2369 @kindex --warn-constructors
2370 @item --warn-constructors
2371 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2372 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2373 detect the use of global constructors.
2374
2375 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2376 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2377 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2378 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2379 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2380 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2381 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2382 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2383 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2384 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2385 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2386 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2387 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2388
2389 @kindex --warn-once
2390 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2391 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2392 @item --warn-once
2393 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2394 which refers to it.
2395
2396 @kindex --warn-section-align
2397 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2398 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2399 @item --warn-section-align
2400 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2401 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2402 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2403 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2404 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2405
2406 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2407 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2408 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2409
2410 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2411 @item --warn-alternate-em
2412 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2413
2414 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2415 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2416 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2417 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2418 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2419
2420 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2421 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2422 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2423 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2424
2425 @kindex --whole-archive
2426 @cindex including an entire archive
2427 @item --whole-archive
2428 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2429 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2430 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2431 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2432 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2433 library. This option may be used more than once.
2434
2435 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2436 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2437 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2438 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2439 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2440
2441 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2442 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2443 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2444 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2445 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2446 @var{symbol}.
2447
2448 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2449 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2450 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2451 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2452
2453 Here is a trivial example:
2454
2455 @smallexample
2456 void *
2457 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2458 @{
2459 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2460 return __real_malloc (c);
2461 @}
2462 @end smallexample
2463
2464 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2465 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2466 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2467 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2468
2469 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2470 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2471 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2472 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2473 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2474
2475 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2476 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2477 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2478 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2479
2480 @smallexample
2481 int
2482 f (void)
2483 @{
2484 return 123;
2485 @}
2486
2487 int
2488 g (void)
2489 @{
2490 return f();
2491 @}
2492 @end smallexample
2493
2494 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2495 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2496 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2497 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2498 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2499 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2500 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2501
2502 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2503 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2504 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2505 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2506 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2507
2508 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2509 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2510 @item --enable-new-dtags
2511 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2512 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2513 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2514 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2515 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2516 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2517 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2518 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2519
2520 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2521 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2522 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2523 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2524 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2525 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2526 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2527
2528 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2529 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2530 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2531 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2532 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2533 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2534 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2535 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2536
2537 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2538 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2539 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2540 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2541 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2542 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2543 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2544 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2545 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2546 compressed using zlib.
2547
2548 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2549 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2550 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2551 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2552 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2553 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2554
2555 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2556 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2557
2558 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2559 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2560 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2561 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2562
2563 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2564 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2565 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2566 @option{--help} option.
2567
2568 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2569 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2570 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2571 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2572 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2573 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2574
2575 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2576 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2577 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2578 has been used.
2579
2580 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2581 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2582
2583 @kindex --build-id
2584 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2585 @item --build-id
2586 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2587 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2588 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2589 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2590 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2591 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2592 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2593 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2594 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2595 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2596 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2597
2598 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2599 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2600 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2601 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2602 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2603 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2604
2605 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2606 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2607 @end table
2608
2609 @c man end
2610
2611 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2612
2613 @c man begin OPTIONS
2614
2615 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2616 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2617 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2618 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2619 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2620 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2621 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2622 object file).
2623
2624 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2625 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2626 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2627 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2628
2629 @table @gcctabopt
2630
2631 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2632 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2633 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2634 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2635 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2636
2637 @kindex --base-file
2638 @item --base-file @var{file}
2639 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2640 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2641 @file{dlltool}.
2642 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2643
2644 @kindex --dll
2645 @item --dll
2646 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2647 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2648 file.
2649 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2650
2651 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2652 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2653 @item --enable-long-section-names
2654 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2655 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2656 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2657 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2658 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2659 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2660 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2661 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2662 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2663 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2664 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2665 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2666 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2667 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2668 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2669 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2670 image and not stripping symbols.
2671 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2672
2673 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2674 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2675 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2676 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2677 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2678 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2679 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2680 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2681 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2682 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2683 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2684 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2685 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2686 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2687 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2688 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2689 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @kindex --leading-underscore
2693 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2694 @item --leading-underscore
2695 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2696 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2697 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2698 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2699
2700 @cindex DLLs, creating
2701 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2702 @item --export-all-symbols
2703 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2704 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2705 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2706 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2707 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2708 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2709 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2710 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2711 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2712 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2713 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2714 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2715 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2716 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2717 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2718 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2719 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2720 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2721 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2722 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2723 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2724 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2725 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2728 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2729 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2730 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2731 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2734 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2735 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2736 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2737
2738 @kindex --file-alignment
2739 @item --file-alignment
2740 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2741 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2742 512.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @cindex heap size
2746 @kindex --heap
2747 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2748 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2749 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2750 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2751 committed.
2752 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2753
2754 @cindex image base
2755 @kindex --image-base
2756 @item --image-base @var{value}
2757 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2758 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2759 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2760 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2761 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2762 for dlls.
2763 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2764
2765 @kindex --kill-at
2766 @item --kill-at
2767 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2768 symbols before they are exported.
2769 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2770
2771 @kindex --large-address-aware
2772 @item --large-address-aware
2773 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2774 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2775 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2776 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2777 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2778 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2779
2780 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2781 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2782 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2783 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2784 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2785 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2786 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2787
2788 @kindex --major-image-version
2789 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2790 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2791 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2792
2793 @kindex --major-os-version
2794 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2795 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2796 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2797
2798 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2799 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2800 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2801 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2802
2803 @kindex --minor-image-version
2804 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2805 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2806 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2807
2808 @kindex --minor-os-version
2809 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2810 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2811 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2812
2813 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2814 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2815 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2816 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2817
2818 @cindex DEF files, creating
2819 @cindex DLLs, creating
2820 @kindex --output-def
2821 @item --output-def @var{file}
2822 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2823 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2824 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2825 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2826 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2827 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2828
2829 @cindex DLLs, creating
2830 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2831 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2832 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2833 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2834 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2835 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2836 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2837 execution are avoided.
2838 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2839
2840 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2841 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2842 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2843 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2844 default.
2845 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2846
2847 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2848 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2849 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2850 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2851 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2852 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2853 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2854 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2855 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2856 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2857
2858 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2859 @item --enable-auto-import
2860 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2861 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2862 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2863 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2864
2865 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2866 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2867
2868 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2869 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2870 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2871
2872 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2873 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2874 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2875 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2876 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2877
2878 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2879 see this message:
2880
2881 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2882 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2883
2884 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2885 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2886 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2887 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2888 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2889 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2890 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2891 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2892 the warning, and exit.
2893
2894 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2895 data type of the exported variable:
2896
2897 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2898 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2899 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2900
2901 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2902 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2903 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2904 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2905
2906 @example
2907 extern type extern_array[];
2908 extern_array[1] -->
2909 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2910 @end example
2911
2912 or
2913
2914 @example
2915 extern type extern_array[];
2916 extern_array[1] -->
2917 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2918 @end example
2919
2920 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2921 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2922
2923 @example
2924 extern struct s extern_struct;
2925 extern_struct.field -->
2926 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2927 @end example
2928
2929 or
2930
2931 @example
2932 extern long long extern_ll;
2933 extern_ll -->
2934 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2935 @end example
2936
2937 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2938 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2939 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2940 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2941 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2942 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2943 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2944 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2945
2946 Original:
2947 @example
2948 --foo.h
2949 extern int arr[];
2950 --foo.c
2951 #include "foo.h"
2952 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2953 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2954 @}
2955 @end example
2956
2957 Solution 1:
2958 @example
2959 --foo.h
2960 extern int arr[];
2961 --foo.c
2962 #include "foo.h"
2963 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2964 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2965 volatile int *parr = arr;
2966 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2967 @}
2968 @end example
2969
2970 Solution 2:
2971 @example
2972 --foo.h
2973 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2974 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2975 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2976 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2977 #else
2978 #define FOO_IMPORT
2979 #endif
2980 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2981 --foo.c
2982 #include "foo.h"
2983 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2984 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2985 @}
2986 @end example
2987
2988 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2989 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2990 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2991 functions).
2992
2993 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2994 @item --disable-auto-import
2995 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2996 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2997 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2998
2999 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3000 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3001 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3002 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3003 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3004 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3005 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3006
3007 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3008 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3009 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3010 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3011
3012 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3013 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3014 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3015 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3016
3017 @kindex --section-alignment
3018 @item --section-alignment
3019 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3020 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3021 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3022
3023 @cindex stack size
3024 @kindex --stack
3025 @item --stack @var{reserve}
3026 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3027 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3028 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3029 committed.
3030 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3031
3032 @kindex --subsystem
3033 @item --subsystem @var{which}
3034 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3035 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3036 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3037 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3038 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3039 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3040 @var{which}.
3041 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3042
3043 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3044 of the PE file header:
3045 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3046
3047 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3048 @item --high-entropy-va
3049 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3050 (ASLR).
3051 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3052 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3053
3054 @kindex --dynamicbase
3055 @item --dynamicbase
3056 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3057 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3058 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3059 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3060
3061 @kindex --forceinteg
3062 @item --forceinteg
3063 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3064
3065 @kindex --nxcompat
3066 @item --nxcompat
3067 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3068 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3069
3070 @kindex --no-isolation
3071 @item --no-isolation
3072 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3073
3074 @kindex --no-seh
3075 @item --no-seh
3076 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3077 this image.
3078
3079 @kindex --no-bind
3080 @item --no-bind
3081 Do not bind this image.
3082
3083 @kindex --wdmdriver
3084 @item --wdmdriver
3085 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3086
3087 @kindex --tsaware
3088 @item --tsaware
3089 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3090
3091 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3092 @item --insert-timestamp
3093 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3094 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3095 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3096 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3097 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3098 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3099 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3100 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3101 identically.
3102
3103 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3104 @item --enable-reloc-section
3105 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3106 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3107 @end table
3108
3109 @c man end
3110
3111 @ifset C6X
3112 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3113
3114 @c man begin OPTIONS
3115
3116 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3117 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3118 all executables use an index of 0.
3119
3120 @table @gcctabopt
3121
3122 @kindex --dsbt-size
3123 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3124 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3125 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3126 entries.
3127
3128 @kindex --dsbt-index
3129 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3130 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3131 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3132 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3133 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3134
3135 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3136 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3137 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3138
3139 @end table
3140
3141 @c man end
3142 @end ifset
3143
3144 @ifset CSKY
3145 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3146
3147 @c man begin OPTIONS
3148
3149 @table @gcctabopt
3150
3151 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3152 @item --branch-stub
3153 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3154 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3155 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3156 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3157 the compiler or assembler.
3158
3159 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3160 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3161 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3162 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3163 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3164 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3165 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3166 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3167 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3168
3169 @end table
3170
3171 @c man end
3172 @end ifset
3173
3174 @ifset M68HC11
3175 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3176
3177 @c man begin OPTIONS
3178
3179 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3180 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3181
3182 @table @gcctabopt
3183
3184 @kindex --no-trampoline
3185 @item --no-trampoline
3186 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3187 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3188 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3189
3190 @kindex --bank-window
3191 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3192 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3193 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3194 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3195 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3196
3197 @end table
3198
3199 @c man end
3200 @end ifset
3201
3202 @ifset M68K
3203 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3204
3205 @c man begin OPTIONS
3206
3207 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3208 when linking for 68K targets.
3209
3210 @table @gcctabopt
3211
3212 @kindex --got
3213 @item --got=@var{type}
3214 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3215 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3216 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3217 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3218
3219 @end table
3220
3221 @c man end
3222 @end ifset
3223
3224 @ifset MIPS
3225 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3226
3227 @c man begin OPTIONS
3228
3229 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3230 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3231 linking for MIPS targets.
3232
3233 @table @gcctabopt
3234
3235 @kindex --insn32
3236 @item --insn32
3237 @kindex --no-insn32
3238 @itemx --no-insn32
3239 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3240 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3241 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3242 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3243 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3244 possible.
3245
3246 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3247 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3248 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3249 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3250 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3251 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3252 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3253 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3254 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3255 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3256 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3257 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3258 an error.
3259
3260 @kindex --compact-branches
3261 @item --compact-branches
3262 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3263 @item --compact-branches
3264 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3265 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3266
3267 @end table
3268
3269 @c man end
3270 @end ifset
3271
3272 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3273 @node Environment
3274 @section Environment Variables
3275
3276 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3277
3278 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3279 @ifclear SingleFormat
3280 @code{GNUTARGET},
3281 @end ifclear
3282 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3283
3284 @ifclear SingleFormat
3285 @kindex GNUTARGET
3286 @cindex default input format
3287 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3288 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3289 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3290 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3291 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3292 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3293 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3294 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3295 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3296 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3297 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3298 @end ifclear
3299
3300 @kindex LDEMULATION
3301 @cindex default emulation
3302 @cindex emulation, default
3303 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3304 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3305 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3306 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3307 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3308 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3309 linker was configured.
3310
3311 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3312 @cindex demangling, default
3313 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3314 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3315 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3316 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3317 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3318 options.
3319
3320 @c man end
3321 @end ifset
3322
3323 @node Scripts
3324 @chapter Linker Scripts
3325
3326 @cindex scripts
3327 @cindex linker scripts
3328 @cindex command files
3329 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3330 written in the linker command language.
3331
3332 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3333 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3334 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3335 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3336 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3337 described below.
3338
3339 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3340 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3341 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3342 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3343 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3344
3345 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3346 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3347 default linker script.
3348
3349 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3350 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3351 Linker Scripts}.
3352
3353 @menu
3354 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3355 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3356 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3357 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3358 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3359 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3360 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3361 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3362 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3363 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3364 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3365 @end menu
3366
3367 @node Basic Script Concepts
3368 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3369 @cindex linker script concepts
3370 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3371 describe the linker script language.
3372
3373 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3374 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3375 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3376 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3377 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3378 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3379 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3380 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3381
3382 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3383 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3384 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3385 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3386 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3387 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3388 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3389 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3390 of debugging information.
3391
3392 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3393 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3394 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3395 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3396 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3397 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3398 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3399 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3400 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3401 RAM address would be the VMA.
3402
3403 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3404 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3405
3406 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3407 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3408 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3409 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3410 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3411 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3412 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3413
3414 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3415 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3416 option.
3417
3418 @node Script Format
3419 @section Linker Script Format
3420 @cindex linker script format
3421 Linker scripts are text files.
3422
3423 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3424 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3425 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3426 generally ignored.
3427
3428 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3429 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3430 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3431 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3432 file name.
3433
3434 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3435 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3436 to whitespace.
3437
3438 @node Simple Example
3439 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3440 @cindex linker script example
3441 @cindex example of linker script
3442 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3443
3444 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3445 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3446 memory layout of the output file.
3447
3448 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3449 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3450 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3451 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3452 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3453 your input files.
3454
3455 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3456 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3457 linker script which will do that:
3458 @smallexample
3459 SECTIONS
3460 @{
3461 . = 0x10000;
3462 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3463 . = 0x8000000;
3464 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3465 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3466 @}
3467 @end smallexample
3468
3469 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3470 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3471 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3472
3473 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3474 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3475 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3476 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3477 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3478 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3479 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3480
3481 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3482 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3483 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3484 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3485 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3486 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3487
3488 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3489 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3490 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3491
3492 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3493 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3494 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3495 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3496 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3497 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3498 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3499
3500 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3501 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3502 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3503 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3504 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3505 sections.
3506
3507 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3508
3509 @node Simple Commands
3510 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3511 @cindex linker script simple commands
3512 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3513
3514 @menu
3515 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3516 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3517 @ifclear SingleFormat
3518 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3519 @end ifclear
3520
3521 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3522 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3523 @end menu
3524
3525 @node Entry Point
3526 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3527 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3528 @cindex start of execution
3529 @cindex first instruction
3530 @cindex entry point
3531 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3532 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3533 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3534 @smallexample
3535 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3536 @end smallexample
3537
3538 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3539 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3540 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3541 @itemize @bullet
3542 @item
3543 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3544 @item
3545 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3546 @item
3547 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3548 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3549 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3550 @item
3551 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3552 @item
3553 The address @code{0}.
3554 @end itemize
3555
3556 @node File Commands
3557 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3558 @cindex linker script file commands
3559 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3560
3561 @table @code
3562 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3563 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3564 @cindex including a linker script
3565 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3566 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3567 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3568 10 levels deep.
3569
3570 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3571 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3572
3573 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3574 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3575 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3576 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3577 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3578 @cindex linker script input object files
3579 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3580 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3581
3582 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3583 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3584 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3585
3586 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3587 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3588
3589 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3590 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3591 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3592 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3593 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3594 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3595 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3596 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3597 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3598 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3599
3600 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3601 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3602 @samp{-l}.
3603
3604 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3605 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3606 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3607
3608 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3609 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3610 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3611 @cindex grouping input files
3612 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3613 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3614 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3615 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3616
3617 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3618 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3619 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3620 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3621 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3622 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3623 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3624 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3625 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3626 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3627 setting afterwards.
3628
3629 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3630 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3631 @cindex output file name in linker script
3632 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3633 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3634 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3635 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3636 precedence.
3637
3638 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3639 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3640
3641 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3642 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3643 @cindex library search path in linker script
3644 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3645 @cindex search path in linker script
3646 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3647 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3648 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3649 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3650 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3651 the command-line option are searched first.
3652
3653 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3654 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3655 @cindex first input file
3656 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3657 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3658 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3659 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3660 first file.
3661 @end table
3662
3663 @ifclear SingleFormat
3664 @node Format Commands
3665 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3666 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3667
3668 @table @code
3669 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3670 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3671 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3672 @cindex output file format in linker script
3673 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3674 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3675 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3676 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3677 line option takes precedence.
3678
3679 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3680 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3681 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3682 desired endianness.
3683
3684 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3685 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3686 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3687 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3688
3689 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3690 command:
3691 @smallexample
3692 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3693 @end smallexample
3694 This says that the default format for the output file is
3695 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3696 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3697 format.
3698
3699 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3700 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3701 @cindex input file format in linker script
3702 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3703 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3704 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3705 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3706 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3707 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3708 @end table
3709 @end ifclear
3710
3711 @node REGION_ALIAS
3712 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3713 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3714 @cindex region alias
3715 @cindex region names
3716
3717 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3718 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3719
3720 @smallexample
3721 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3722 @end smallexample
3723
3724 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3725 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3726 to memory regions. An example follows.
3727
3728 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3729 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3730 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3731 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3732 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3733 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3734 sections:
3735
3736 @itemize @bullet
3737 @item
3738 @code{.text} program code;
3739 @item
3740 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3741 @item
3742 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3743 @item
3744 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3745 @end itemize
3746
3747 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3748 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3749 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3750 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3751 @code{C}:
3752 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3753 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3754 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3755 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3756 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3757 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3758 @end multitable
3759 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3760 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3761 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3762 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3763
3764 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3765 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3766 memory layout:
3767 @smallexample
3768 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3769
3770 SECTIONS
3771 @{
3772 .text :
3773 @{
3774 *(.text)
3775 @} > REGION_TEXT
3776 .rodata :
3777 @{
3778 *(.rodata)
3779 rodata_end = .;
3780 @} > REGION_RODATA
3781 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3782 @{
3783 data_start = .;
3784 *(.data)
3785 @} > REGION_DATA
3786 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3787 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3788 .bss :
3789 @{
3790 *(.bss)
3791 @} > REGION_BSS
3792 @}
3793 @end smallexample
3794
3795 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3796 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3797 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3798 @table @code
3799 @item A
3800 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3801 @smallexample
3802 MEMORY
3803 @{
3804 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3805 @}
3806
3807 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3808 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3809 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3810 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3811 @end smallexample
3812 @item B
3813 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3814 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3815 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3816 @smallexample
3817 MEMORY
3818 @{
3819 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3820 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3821 @}
3822
3823 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3824 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3825 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3826 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3827 @end smallexample
3828 @item C
3829 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3830 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3831 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3832 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3833 @smallexample
3834 MEMORY
3835 @{
3836 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3837 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3838 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3839 @}
3840
3841 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3842 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3843 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3844 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3845 @end smallexample
3846 @end table
3847
3848 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3849 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3850 necessary:
3851 @smallexample
3852 #include <string.h>
3853
3854 extern char data_start [];
3855 extern char data_size [];
3856 extern char data_load_start [];
3857
3858 void copy_data(void)
3859 @{
3860 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3861 @{
3862 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3863 @}
3864 @}
3865 @end smallexample
3866
3867 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3868 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3869 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3870
3871 @table @code
3872 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3873 @kindex ASSERT
3874 @cindex assertion in linker script
3875 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3876 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3877
3878 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3879 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3880 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3881 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3882 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3883
3884 @smallexample
3885 .stack :
3886 @{
3887 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3888 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3889 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3890 @}
3891 @end smallexample
3892
3893 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3894 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3895 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3896
3897 @smallexample
3898 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3899 .stack :
3900 @{
3901 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3902 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3903 @}
3904 @end smallexample
3905
3906 will work.
3907
3908 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3909 @kindex EXTERN
3910 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3911 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3912 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3913 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3914 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3915 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3916
3917 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3918 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3919 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3920 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3921 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3922 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3923
3924 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3925 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3926 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3927 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3928 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3929 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3930
3931 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3932 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3933 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3934 @cindex section groups
3935 @cindex COMDAT
3936 This command has the same effect as the
3937 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3938 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3939 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3940 specified (@samp{-r}).
3941
3942 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3943 @kindex INSERT
3944 @cindex insert user script into default script
3945 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3946 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3947 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3948 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3949 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3950 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3951 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3952 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3953 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3954 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3955 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3956 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3957 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3958
3959 @smallexample
3960 SECTIONS
3961 @{
3962 OVERLAY :
3963 @{
3964 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3965 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3966 @}
3967 @}
3968 INSERT AFTER .text;
3969 @end smallexample
3970
3971 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3972 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3973 @cindex cross references
3974 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3975 references among certain output sections.
3976
3977 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3978 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3979 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3980 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3981 a function defined in the other section.
3982
3983 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3984 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3985 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3986 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3987 names.
3988
3989 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3990 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3991 @cindex cross references
3992 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3993 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3994
3995 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3996 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3997 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3998 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3999 must never call back.
4000
4001 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4002 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4003 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4004 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4005 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4006 names, not input section names.
4007
4008 @ifclear SingleFormat
4009 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4010 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4011 @cindex machine architecture
4012 @cindex architecture
4013 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4014 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4015 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4016 the @samp{-f} option.
4017 @end ifclear
4018
4019 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4020 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4021 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4022 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4023 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4024 @xref{Expression Section}.
4025 @end table
4026
4027 @node Assignments
4028 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
4029 @cindex assignment in scripts
4030 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
4031 @cindex variables, defining
4032 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4033 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4034
4035 @menu
4036 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4037 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4038 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4039 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4040 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4041 @end menu
4042
4043 @node Simple Assignments
4044 @subsection Simple Assignments
4045
4046 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4047
4048 @table @code
4049 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4050 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4051 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4052 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4053 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4054 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4055 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4056 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4057 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4058 @end table
4059
4060 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4061 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4062 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4063
4064 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4065 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4066
4067 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4068
4069 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4070
4071 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4072 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4073 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4074
4075 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4076 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4077
4078 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4079 assignments may be used:
4080
4081 @smallexample
4082 floating_point = 0;
4083 SECTIONS
4084 @{
4085 .text :
4086 @{
4087 *(.text)
4088 _etext = .;
4089 @}
4090 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4091 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4092 @}
4093 @end smallexample
4094 @noindent
4095 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4096 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4097 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4098 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4099 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4100
4101 @node HIDDEN
4102 @subsection HIDDEN
4103 @cindex HIDDEN
4104 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4105 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4106
4107 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4108 @code{HIDDEN}:
4109
4110 @smallexample
4111 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4112 SECTIONS
4113 @{
4114 .text :
4115 @{
4116 *(.text)
4117 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4118 @}
4119 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4120 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4121 @}
4122 @end smallexample
4123 @noindent
4124 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4125
4126 @node PROVIDE
4127 @subsection PROVIDE
4128 @cindex PROVIDE
4129 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4130 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4131 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4132 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4133 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4134 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4135 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4136 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4137
4138 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4139 @smallexample
4140 SECTIONS
4141 @{
4142 .text :
4143 @{
4144 *(.text)
4145 _etext = .;
4146 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4147 @}
4148 @}
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4152 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4153 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4154 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4155 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4156 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4157
4158 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4159 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4160 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4161 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4162 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4163
4164 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4165 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4166 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4167 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4168 hidden and won't be exported.
4169
4170 @node Source Code Reference
4171 @subsection Source Code Reference
4172
4173 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4174 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4175 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4176 symbol that does not have a value.
4177
4178 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4179 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4180 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4181 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4182 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4183 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4184 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4185 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4186
4187 @smallexample
4188 extern int foo;
4189 @end smallexample
4190
4191 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4192
4193 @smallexample
4194 _foo = 1000;
4195 @end smallexample
4196
4197 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4198 transformation has taken place.
4199
4200 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4201 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4202 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4203 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4204 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4205 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4206 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4207
4208 @smallexample
4209 int foo = 1000;
4210 @end smallexample
4211
4212 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4213 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4214 number 1000 is initially stored.
4215
4216 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4217 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4218 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4219 So:
4220
4221 @smallexample
4222 foo = 1;
4223 @end smallexample
4224
4225 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4226 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4227 address. Whereas:
4228
4229 @smallexample
4230 int * a = & foo;
4231 @end smallexample
4232
4233 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4234 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4235 the variable @samp{a}.
4236
4237 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4238 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4239 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4240
4241 @smallexample
4242 foo = 1000;
4243 @end smallexample
4244
4245 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4246 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4247 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4248 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4249 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4250
4251 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4252 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4253 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4254 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4255 linker script contains these declarations:
4256
4257 @smallexample
4258 @group
4259 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4260 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4261 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4262 @end group
4263 @end smallexample
4264
4265 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4266
4267 @smallexample
4268 @group
4269 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4270
4271 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4272 @end group
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4276 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4277 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4278
4279 @smallexample
4280 @group
4281 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4282
4283 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4284 @end group
4285 @end smallexample
4286
4287 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4288 operators.
4289
4290 @node SECTIONS
4291 @section SECTIONS Command
4292 @kindex SECTIONS
4293 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4294 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4295
4296 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4297 @smallexample
4298 SECTIONS
4299 @{
4300 @var{sections-command}
4301 @var{sections-command}
4302 @dots{}
4303 @}
4304 @end smallexample
4305
4306 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4307
4308 @itemize @bullet
4309 @item
4310 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4311 @item
4312 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4313 @item
4314 an output section description
4315 @item
4316 an overlay description
4317 @end itemize
4318
4319 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4320 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4321 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4322 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4323 the layout of the output file.
4324
4325 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4326 below.
4327
4328 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4329 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4330 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4331 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4332 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4333 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4334
4335 @menu
4336 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4337 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4338 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4339 * Input Section:: Input section description
4340 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4341 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4342 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4343 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4344 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4345 @end menu
4346
4347 @node Output Section Description
4348 @subsection Output Section Description
4349 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4350 @smallexample
4351 @group
4352 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4353 [AT(@var{lma})]
4354 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4355 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4356 [@var{constraint}]
4357 @{
4358 @var{output-section-command}
4359 @var{output-section-command}
4360 @dots{}
4361 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4362 @end group
4363 @end smallexample
4364
4365 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4366
4367 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4368 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4369 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4370 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4371 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4372
4373 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4374
4375 @itemize @bullet
4376 @item
4377 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4378 @item
4379 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4380 @item
4381 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4382 @item
4383 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4384 @end itemize
4385
4386 @node Output Section Name
4387 @subsection Output Section Name
4388 @cindex name, section
4389 @cindex section name
4390 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4391 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4392 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4393 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4394 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4395 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4396 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4397 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4398 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4399 commas must be quoted.
4400
4401 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4402 Discarding}.
4403
4404 @node Output Section Address
4405 @subsection Output Section Address
4406 @cindex address, section
4407 @cindex section address
4408 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4409 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4410 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4411
4412 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4413 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4414 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4415 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4416 contained within the output section.
4417
4418 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4419
4420 @itemize @bullet
4421 @item
4422 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4423 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4424 in that region.
4425
4426 @item
4427 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4428 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4429 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4430 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4431
4432 @item
4433 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4434 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4435 counter.
4436 @end itemize
4437
4438 @noindent
4439 For example:
4440
4441 @smallexample
4442 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4443 @end smallexample
4444
4445 @noindent
4446 and
4447
4448 @smallexample
4449 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4450 @end smallexample
4451
4452 @noindent
4453 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4454 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4455 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4456 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4457 input sections.
4458
4459 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4460 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4461 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4462 do something like this:
4463 @smallexample
4464 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4465 @end smallexample
4466 @noindent
4467 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4468 aligned upward to the specified value.
4469
4470 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4471 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4472 sections are ignored).
4473
4474 @node Input Section
4475 @subsection Input Section Description
4476 @cindex input sections
4477 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4478 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4479
4480 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4481 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4482 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4483 map the input files into your memory layout.
4484
4485 @menu
4486 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4487 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4488 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4489 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4490 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4491 @end menu
4492
4493 @node Input Section Basics
4494 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4495 @cindex input section basics
4496 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4497 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4498
4499 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4500 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4501
4502 The most common input section description is to include all input
4503 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4504 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4505 @smallexample
4506 *(.text)
4507 @end smallexample
4508 @noindent
4509 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4510 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4511 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4512 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4513 example:
4514 @smallexample
4515 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4516 @end smallexample
4517 @noindent
4518 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4519 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4520 placed inside the section list, for example:
4521 @smallexample
4522 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4523 @end smallexample
4524 @noindent
4525 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4526 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4527 more than one section, as described below.
4528
4529 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4530 @smallexample
4531 *(.text .rdata)
4532 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4533 @end smallexample
4534 @noindent
4535 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4536 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4537 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4538 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4539 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4540 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4541
4542 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4543 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4544 immediately following section, for example:
4545 @smallexample
4546 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4547 @end smallexample
4548 @noindent
4549 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4550 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4551 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4552 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4553 could be modified to:
4554 @smallexample
4555 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4556 @end smallexample
4557 @noindent
4558 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4559 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4560 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4561 @smallexample
4562 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4563 @end smallexample
4564
4565 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4566 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4567 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4568 @smallexample
4569 data.o(.data)
4570 @end smallexample
4571
4572 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4573 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4574
4575 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4576
4577 @smallexample
4578 @group
4579 SECTIONS @{
4580 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4581 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4582 @}
4583 @end group
4584 @end smallexample
4585
4586 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4587 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4588 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4589 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4590 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4591
4592 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4593 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4594 with no whitespace around the colon.
4595
4596 @table @samp
4597 @item archive:file
4598 matches file within archive
4599 @item archive:
4600 matches the whole archive
4601 @item :file
4602 matches file but not one in an archive
4603 @end table
4604
4605 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4606 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4607 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4608 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4609 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4610 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4611 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4612 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4613 command.
4614
4615 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4616 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4617 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4618 @smallexample
4619 data.o
4620 @end smallexample
4621
4622 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4623 and does not contain any wild card
4624 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4625 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4626 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4627 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4628 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4629 the archive search path.
4630
4631 @node Input Section Wildcards
4632 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4633 @cindex input section wildcards
4634 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4635 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4636 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4637 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4638 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4639
4640 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4641 pattern for the file name.
4642
4643 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4644
4645 @table @samp
4646 @item *
4647 matches any number of characters
4648 @item ?
4649 matches any single character
4650 @item [@var{chars}]
4651 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4652 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4653 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4654 @item \
4655 quotes the following character
4656 @end table
4657
4658 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4659 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4660 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4661 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4662 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4663 a @samp{/} character.
4664
4665 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4666 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4667 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4668
4669 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4670 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4671 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4672 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4673 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4674 @smallexample
4675 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4676 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4677 @end smallexample
4678
4679 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4680 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4681 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4682 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4683 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4684 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4685 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4686
4687 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4688 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4689 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4690 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4691 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4692 needed.
4693
4694 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4695 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4696 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4697 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4698 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4699 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4700 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4701 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4702
4703 @cindex SORT
4704 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4705
4706 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4707 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4708
4709 @enumerate
4710 @item
4711 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4712 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4713 sections have the same name.
4714 @item
4715 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4716 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4717 sections have the same alignment.
4718 @item
4719 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4720 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4721 @item
4722 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4723 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4724 @item
4725 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4726 @end enumerate
4727
4728 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4729 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4730 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4731
4732 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4733 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4734 treated as nested sorting command.
4735
4736 @enumerate
4737 @item
4738 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4739 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4740 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4741 @item
4742 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4743 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4744 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4745 @end enumerate
4746
4747 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4748 command-line option will be ignored.
4749
4750 @cindex SORT_NONE
4751 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4752 section sorting option.
4753
4754 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4755 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4756 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4757
4758 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4759 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4760 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4761 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4762 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4763 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4764 @smallexample
4765 @group
4766 SECTIONS @{
4767 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4768 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4769 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4770 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4771 @}
4772 @end group
4773 @end smallexample
4774
4775 @node Input Section Common
4776 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4777 @cindex common symbol placement
4778 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4779 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4780 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4781 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4782 named @samp{COMMON}.
4783
4784 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4785 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4786 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4787 input files are placed in another section.
4788
4789 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4790 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4791 @smallexample
4792 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4793 @end smallexample
4794
4795 @cindex scommon section
4796 @cindex small common symbols
4797 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4798 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4799 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4800 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4801 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4802 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4803 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4804 locations.
4805
4806 @cindex [COMMON]
4807 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4808 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4809 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4810
4811 @node Input Section Keep
4812 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4813 @cindex KEEP
4814 @cindex garbage collection
4815 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4816 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4817 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4818 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4819 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4820
4821 @node Input Section Example
4822 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4823 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4824 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4825 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4826 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4827 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4828 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4829 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4830 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4831 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4832
4833 @smallexample
4834 @group
4835 SECTIONS @{
4836 outputa 0x10000 :
4837 @{
4838 all.o
4839 foo.o (.input1)
4840 @}
4841 @end group
4842 @group
4843 outputb :
4844 @{
4845 foo.o (.input2)
4846 foo1.o (.input1)
4847 @}
4848 @end group
4849 @group
4850 outputc :
4851 @{
4852 *(.input1)
4853 *(.input2)
4854 @}
4855 @}
4856 @end group
4857 @end smallexample
4858
4859 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4860 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4861 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4862 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4863 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4864 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4865 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4866
4867 @node Output Section Data
4868 @subsection Output Section Data
4869 @cindex data
4870 @cindex section data
4871 @cindex output section data
4872 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4873 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4874 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4875 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4876 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4877 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4878 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4879 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4880 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4881 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4882 counter.
4883
4884 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4885 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4886 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4887 stored.
4888
4889 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4890 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4891 @smallexample
4892 BYTE(1)
4893 LONG(addr)
4894 @end smallexample
4895
4896 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4897 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4898 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4899 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4900 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4901
4902 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4903 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4904 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4905 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4906 endianness of the first input object file.
4907
4908 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4909 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4910 @smallexample
4911 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4912 @end smallexample
4913 whereas this will work:
4914 @smallexample
4915 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4916 @end smallexample
4917
4918 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4919 @cindex holes, filling
4920 @cindex unspecified memory
4921 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4922 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4923 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4924 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4925 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4926 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4927 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4928 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4929 different parts of an output section.
4930
4931 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4932 value @samp{0x90}:
4933 @smallexample
4934 FILL(0x90909090)
4935 @end smallexample
4936
4937 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4938 section attribute, but it only affects the
4939 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4940 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4941 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4942 expression.
4943
4944 @node Output Section Keywords
4945 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4946 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4947 commands.
4948
4949 @table @code
4950 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4951 @cindex input filename symbols
4952 @cindex filename symbols
4953 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4954 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4955 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4956 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4957 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4958
4959 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4960 normally used for any other object file format.
4961
4962 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4963 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4964 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4965 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4966 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4967 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4968 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4969 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4970 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4971 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4972 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4973 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4974 ignored for other object file formats.
4975
4976 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4977 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4978 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4979 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4980 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4981 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4982 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4983 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4984 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4985 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4986 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4987 @code{exit}.
4988
4989 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4990 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4991 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4992 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4993 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4994 runtime code expects to see.
4995
4996 @smallexample
4997 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4998 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4999 *(.ctors)
5000 LONG(0)
5001 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5002 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5003 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5004 *(.dtors)
5005 LONG(0)
5006 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5007 @end smallexample
5008
5009 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5010 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5011 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5012 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5013 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5014 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5015 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5016 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
5017
5018 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5019 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5020 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5021 scripts.
5022
5023 @end table
5024
5025 @node Output Section Discarding
5026 @subsection Output Section Discarding
5027 @cindex discarding sections
5028 @cindex sections, discarding
5029 @cindex removing sections
5030 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5031 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5032 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5033 @smallexample
5034 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5035 @end smallexample
5036 @noindent
5037 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5038 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5039 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5040 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5041 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5042 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5043 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5044 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5045 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5046
5047 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5048 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5049 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5050 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5051 section is discarded.
5052
5053 @cindex /DISCARD/
5054 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5055 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5056 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5057
5058 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5059 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5060 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5061 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5062
5063 @node Output Section Attributes
5064 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5065 @cindex output section attributes
5066 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5067 like this:
5068
5069 @smallexample
5070 @group
5071 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5072 [AT(@var{lma})]
5073 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5074 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5075 [@var{constraint}]
5076 @{
5077 @var{output-section-command}
5078 @var{output-section-command}
5079 @dots{}
5080 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5081 @end group
5082 @end smallexample
5083
5084 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5085 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5086 remaining section attributes.
5087
5088 @menu
5089 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5090 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5091 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5092 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5093 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5094 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5095 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5096 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5097 @end menu
5098
5099 @node Output Section Type
5100 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5101 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5102 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5103
5104 @table @code
5105 @item NOLOAD
5106 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5107 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5108 @item DSECT
5109 @itemx COPY
5110 @itemx INFO
5111 @itemx OVERLAY
5112 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5113 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5114 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5115 section when the program is run.
5116 @end table
5117
5118 @kindex NOLOAD
5119 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5120 @cindex loading, preventing
5121 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5122 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5123 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5124 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5125 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5126 @smallexample
5127 @group
5128 SECTIONS @{
5129 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5130 @dots{}
5131 @}
5132 @end group
5133 @end smallexample
5134
5135 @node Output Section LMA
5136 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5137 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5138 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5139 @cindex load address
5140 @cindex section load address
5141 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5142 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5143 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5144 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5145 address is optional.
5146
5147 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5148 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5149 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5150 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5151 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5152
5153 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5154 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5155 load address:
5156
5157 @itemize @bullet
5158 @item
5159 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5160 the LMA address as well.
5161
5162 @item
5163 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5164
5165 @item
5166 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5167 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5168 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5169 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5170 the last section in the located region.
5171
5172 @item
5173 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5174 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5175
5176 @item
5177 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5178 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5179 @end itemize
5180
5181 @cindex ROM initialized data
5182 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5183 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5184 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5185 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5186 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5187 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5188 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5189 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5190 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5191
5192 @smallexample
5193 @group
5194 SECTIONS
5195 @{
5196 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5197 .mdata 0x2000 :
5198 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5199 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5200 .bss 0x3000 :
5201 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5202 @}
5203 @end group
5204 @end smallexample
5205
5206 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5207 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5208 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5209 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5210 script.
5211
5212 @smallexample
5213 @group
5214 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5215 char *src = &_etext;
5216 char *dst = &_data;
5217
5218 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5219 while (dst < &_edata)
5220 *dst++ = *src++;
5221
5222 /* Zero bss. */
5223 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5224 *dst = 0;
5225 @end group
5226 @end smallexample
5227
5228 @node Forced Output Alignment
5229 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5230 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5231 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5232 @cindex output section alignment
5233 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5234 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5235 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5236
5237 @node Forced Input Alignment
5238 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5239 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5240 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5241 @cindex input section alignment
5242 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5243 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5244 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5245
5246 @node Output Section Constraint
5247 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5248 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5249 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5250 @cindex constraints on output sections
5251 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5252 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5253 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5254 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5255
5256 @node Output Section Region
5257 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5258 @kindex >@var{region}
5259 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5260 @cindex memory regions and sections
5261 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5262 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5263
5264 Here is a simple example:
5265 @smallexample
5266 @group
5267 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5268 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5269 @end group
5270 @end smallexample
5271
5272 @node Output Section Phdr
5273 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5274 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5275 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5276 @cindex program headers and sections
5277 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5278 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5279 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5280 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5281 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5282 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5283
5284 Here is a simple example:
5285 @smallexample
5286 @group
5287 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5288 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5289 @end group
5290 @end smallexample
5291
5292 @node Output Section Fill
5293 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5294 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5295 @cindex section fill pattern
5296 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5297 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5298 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5299 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5300 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5301 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5302 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5303 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5304 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5305 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5306 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5307 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5308 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5309
5310 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5311 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5312
5313 Here is a simple example:
5314 @smallexample
5315 @group
5316 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5317 @end group
5318 @end smallexample
5319
5320 @node Overlay Description
5321 @subsection Overlay Description
5322 @kindex OVERLAY
5323 @cindex overlays
5324 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5325 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5326 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5327 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5328 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5329 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5330 than another.
5331
5332 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5333 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5334 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5335 command is as follows:
5336 @smallexample
5337 @group
5338 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5339 @{
5340 @var{secname1}
5341 @{
5342 @var{output-section-command}
5343 @var{output-section-command}
5344 @dots{}
5345 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5346 @var{secname2}
5347 @{
5348 @var{output-section-command}
5349 @var{output-section-command}
5350 @dots{}
5351 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5352 @dots{}
5353 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5354 @end group
5355 @end smallexample
5356
5357 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5358 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5359 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5360 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5361 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5362 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5363
5364 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5365 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5366
5367 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5368 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5369 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5370 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5371 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5372 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5373
5374 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5375 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5376 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5377 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5378 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5379
5380 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5381 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5382 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5383 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5384 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5385 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5386 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5387
5388 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5389 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5390
5391 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5392 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5393 @smallexample
5394 @group
5395 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5396 @{
5397 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5398 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5399 @}
5400 @end group
5401 @end smallexample
5402 @noindent
5403 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5404 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5405 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5406 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5407 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5408 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5409
5410 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5411 like the following.
5412
5413 @smallexample
5414 @group
5415 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5416 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5417 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5418 @end group
5419 @end smallexample
5420
5421 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5422 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5423 example could have been written identically as follows.
5424
5425 @smallexample
5426 @group
5427 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5428 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5429 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5430 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5431 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5432 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5433 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5434 @end group
5435 @end smallexample
5436
5437 @node MEMORY
5438 @section MEMORY Command
5439 @kindex MEMORY
5440 @cindex memory regions
5441 @cindex regions of memory
5442 @cindex allocating memory
5443 @cindex discontinuous memory
5444 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5445 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5446
5447 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5448 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5449 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5450 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5451 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5452 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5453 around to fit into the available regions.
5454
5455 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5456 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5457 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5458 @code{MEMORY} is:
5459 @smallexample
5460 @group
5461 MEMORY
5462 @{
5463 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5464 @dots{}
5465 @}
5466 @end group
5467 @end smallexample
5468
5469 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5470 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5471 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5472 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5473 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5474 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5475 command.
5476
5477 @cindex memory region attributes
5478 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5479 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5480 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5481 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5482 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5483 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5484 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5485
5486 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5487 @table @samp
5488 @item R
5489 Read-only section
5490 @item W
5491 Read/write section
5492 @item X
5493 Executable section
5494 @item A
5495 Allocatable section
5496 @item I
5497 Initialized section
5498 @item L
5499 Same as @samp{I}
5500 @item !
5501 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5502 @end table
5503
5504 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5505 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5506 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5507 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5508 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5509 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5510 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5511 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5512
5513 @kindex ORIGIN =
5514 @kindex o =
5515 @kindex org =
5516 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5517 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5518 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5519 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5520 @code{ORG}).
5521
5522 @kindex LENGTH =
5523 @kindex len =
5524 @kindex l =
5525 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5526 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5527 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5528 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5529
5530 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5531 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5532 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5533 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5534 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5535 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5536 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5537 region.
5538
5539 @smallexample
5540 @group
5541 MEMORY
5542 @{
5543 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5544 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5545 @}
5546 @end group
5547 @end smallexample
5548
5549 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5550 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5551 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5552 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5553 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5554 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5555 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5556 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5557 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5558
5559 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5560 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5561 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5562
5563 @smallexample
5564 @group
5565 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5566 @end group
5567 @end smallexample
5568
5569 @node PHDRS
5570 @section PHDRS Command
5571 @kindex PHDRS
5572 @cindex program headers
5573 @cindex ELF program headers
5574 @cindex program segments
5575 @cindex segments, ELF
5576 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5577 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5578 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5579 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5580
5581 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5582 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5583 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5584 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5585 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5586
5587 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5588 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5589 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5590 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5591 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5592
5593 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5594 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5595 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5596
5597 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5598 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5599
5600 @smallexample
5601 @group
5602 PHDRS
5603 @{
5604 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5605 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5606 @}
5607 @end group
5608 @end smallexample
5609
5610 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5611 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5612 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5613 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5614 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5615 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5616
5617 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5618 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5619 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5620 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5621 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5622 Section Phdr}.
5623
5624 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5625 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5626 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5627 contain the section.
5628
5629 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5630 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5631 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5632 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5633 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5634 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5635 segment at all.
5636
5637 @kindex FILEHDR
5638 @kindex PHDRS
5639 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5640 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5641 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5642 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5643 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5644 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5645 these keywords.
5646
5647 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5648 value of the keyword.
5649
5650 @table @asis
5651 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5652 Indicates an unused program header.
5653
5654 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5655 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5656 the file.
5657
5658 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5659 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5660
5661 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5662 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5663 found.
5664
5665 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5666 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5667
5668 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5669 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5670 ABI.
5671
5672 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5673 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5674
5675 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5676 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5677
5678 @item @var{expression}
5679 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5680 be used for types not defined above.
5681 @end table
5682
5683 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5684 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5685 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5686 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5687 output section attribute.
5688
5689 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5690 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5691 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5692 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5693 header.
5694
5695 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5696 headers used on a native ELF system.
5697
5698 @example
5699 @group
5700 PHDRS
5701 @{
5702 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5703 interp PT_INTERP ;
5704 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5705 data PT_LOAD ;
5706 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5707 @}
5708
5709 SECTIONS
5710 @{
5711 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5712 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5713 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5714 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5715 @dots{}
5716 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5717 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5718 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5719 @dots{}
5720 @}
5721 @end group
5722 @end example
5723
5724 @node VERSION
5725 @section VERSION Command
5726 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5727 @cindex symbol versions
5728 @cindex version script
5729 @cindex versions of symbols
5730 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5731 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5732 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5733 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5734 shared library.
5735
5736 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5737 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5738 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5739
5740 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5741 @smallexample
5742 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5743 @end smallexample
5744
5745 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5746 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5747 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5748 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5749 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5750 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5751 library.
5752
5753 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5754 examples.
5755
5756 @smallexample
5757 VERS_1.1 @{
5758 global:
5759 foo1;
5760 local:
5761 old*;
5762 original*;
5763 new*;
5764 @};
5765
5766 VERS_1.2 @{
5767 foo2;
5768 @} VERS_1.1;
5769
5770 VERS_2.0 @{
5771 bar1; bar2;
5772 extern "C++" @{
5773 ns::*;
5774 "f(int, double)";
5775 @};
5776 @} VERS_1.2;
5777 @end smallexample
5778
5779 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5780 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5781 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5782 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5783 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5784 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5785 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5786 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5787 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5788 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5789
5790 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5791 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5792 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5793
5794 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5795 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5796 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5797
5798 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5799 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5800 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5801 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5802 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5803 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5804 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5805 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5806 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5807
5808 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5809 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5810 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5811 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5812
5813 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5814 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5815 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5816 won't.
5817
5818 @smallexample
5819 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5820 @end smallexample
5821
5822 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5823 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5824 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5825 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5826 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5827 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5828 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5829 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5830 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5831 search for each symbol reference.
5832
5833 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5834 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5835 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5836 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5837 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5838 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5839 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5840 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5841 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5842
5843 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5844 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5845 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5846 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5847 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5848 @smallexample
5849 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5850 @end smallexample
5851 @noindent
5852 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5853 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5854 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5855 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5856 takes precedence over a version script.
5857
5858 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5859 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5860 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5861 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5862 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5863
5864 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5865 source file. Here is an example:
5866
5867 @smallexample
5868 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5869 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5870 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5871 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5872 @end smallexample
5873
5874 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5875 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5876 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5877 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5878
5879 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5880 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5881 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5882 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5883 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5884 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5885
5886 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5887 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5888 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5889 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5890
5891 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5892
5893 @smallexample
5894 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5895 @end smallexample
5896
5897 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5898 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5899 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5900 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5901 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5902
5903 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5904 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5905 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5906 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5907 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5908 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5909 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5910 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5911 expect when you upgrade.
5912
5913 @node Expressions
5914 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5915 @cindex expressions
5916 @cindex arithmetic
5917 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5918 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5919 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5920 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5921
5922 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5923
5924 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5925 expressions.
5926
5927 @menu
5928 * Constants:: Constants
5929 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5930 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5931 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5932 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5933 * Operators:: Operators
5934 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5935 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5936 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5937 @end menu
5938
5939 @node Constants
5940 @subsection Constants
5941 @cindex integer notation
5942 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5943 All constants are integers.
5944
5945 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5946 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5947 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5948 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5949 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5950 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5951
5952 @cindex scaled integers
5953 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5954 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5955 @cindex suffixes for integers
5956 @cindex integer suffixes
5957 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5958 constant by
5959 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5960 @ifnottex
5961 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5962 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5963 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5964 @end ifnottex
5965 @tex
5966 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5967 @end tex
5968 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5969 respectively. For example, the following
5970 all refer to the same quantity:
5971
5972 @smallexample
5973 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5974 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5975 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5976 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5977 @end smallexample
5978
5979 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5980 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5981
5982 @node Symbolic Constants
5983 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5984 @cindex symbolic constants
5985 @kindex CONSTANT
5986 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5987 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5988
5989 @table @code
5990 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5991 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5992 The target's maximum page size.
5993
5994 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5995 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5996 The target's default page size.
5997 @end table
5998
5999 So for example:
6000
6001 @smallexample
6002 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6003 @end smallexample
6004
6005 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6006 supported by the target.
6007
6008 @node Symbols
6009 @subsection Symbol Names
6010 @cindex symbol names
6011 @cindex names
6012 @cindex quoted symbol names
6013 @kindex "
6014 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6015 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6016 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6017 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6018 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6019 @smallexample
6020 "SECTION" = 9;
6021 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6022 @end smallexample
6023
6024 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6025 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6026 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6027
6028 @node Orphan Sections
6029 @subsection Orphan Sections
6030 @cindex orphan
6031 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6032 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6033 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6034 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6035 in which to place the orphaned input section.
6036
6037 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6038 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6039 placed at the end of that output section.
6040
6041 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6042 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6043 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6044 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6045 one new output section.
6046
6047 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6048 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6049 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6050 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6051 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6052 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6053 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6054
6055 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6056 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6057 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6058
6059 @node Location Counter
6060 @subsection The Location Counter
6061 @kindex .
6062 @cindex dot
6063 @cindex location counter
6064 @cindex current output location
6065 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6066 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6067 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6068 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6069 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6070
6071 @cindex holes
6072 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6073 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6074 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6075 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6076 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6077
6078 @smallexample
6079 SECTIONS
6080 @{
6081 output :
6082 @{
6083 file1(.text)
6084 . = . + 1000;
6085 file2(.text)
6086 . += 1000;
6087 file3(.text)
6088 @} = 0x12345678;
6089 @}
6090 @end smallexample
6091 @noindent
6092 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6093 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6094 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6095 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6096 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6097 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6098
6099 @cindex dot inside sections
6100 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6101 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6102 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6103 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6104 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6105 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6106
6107 @smallexample
6108 SECTIONS
6109 @{
6110 . = 0x100
6111 .text: @{
6112 *(.text)
6113 . = 0x200
6114 @}
6115 . = 0x500
6116 .data: @{
6117 *(.data)
6118 . += 0x600
6119 @}
6120 @}
6121 @end smallexample
6122
6123 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6124 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6125 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6126 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6127 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6128 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6129 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6130 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6131
6132 @cindex dot outside sections
6133 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6134 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6135 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6136
6137 @smallexample
6138 SECTIONS
6139 @{
6140 start_of_text = . ;
6141 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6142 end_of_text = . ;
6143
6144 start_of_data = . ;
6145 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6146 end_of_data = . ;
6147 @}
6148 @end smallexample
6149
6150 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6151 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6152 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6153 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6154 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6155 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6156 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6157 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6158 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6159 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6160 as follows:
6161
6162 @smallexample
6163 SECTIONS
6164 @{
6165 start_of_text = . ;
6166 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6167 end_of_text = . ;
6168
6169 start_of_data = . ;
6170 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6171 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6172 end_of_data = . ;
6173 @}
6174 @end smallexample
6175
6176 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6177 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6178 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6179 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6180 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6181 section. So you could write:
6182
6183 @smallexample
6184 SECTIONS
6185 @{
6186 start_of_text = . ;
6187 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6188 end_of_text = . ;
6189
6190 . = . ;
6191 start_of_data = . ;
6192 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6193 end_of_data = . ;
6194 @}
6195 @end smallexample
6196
6197 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6198 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6199
6200 @need 2000
6201 @node Operators
6202 @subsection Operators
6203 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6204 @cindex arithmetic operators
6205 @cindex precedence in expressions
6206 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6207 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6208 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6209 @ifnottex
6210 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6211 @smallexample
6212 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6213 (highest)
6214 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6215 2 left * / %
6216 3 left + -
6217 4 left >> <<
6218 5 left == != > < <= >=
6219 6 left &
6220 7 left |
6221 8 left &&
6222 9 left ||
6223 10 right ? :
6224 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6225 (lowest)
6226 @end smallexample
6227 Notes:
6228 (1) Prefix operators
6229 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6230 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6231 @end ifnottex
6232 @tex
6233 \vskip \baselineskip
6234 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6235 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6236 \hrule
6237 \halign
6238 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6239 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6240 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6241 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6242 \noalign{\hrule}
6243 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6244 &highest&&&&&\cr
6245 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6246 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6247 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6248 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6249 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6250 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6251 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6252 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6253 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6254 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6255 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6256 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6257 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6258 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6259 \hrule}
6260 @end tex
6261 @iftex
6262 {
6263 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6264 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6265 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6266 }
6267 @end iftex
6268 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6269
6270 @node Evaluation
6271 @subsection Evaluation
6272 @cindex lazy evaluation
6273 @cindex expression evaluation order
6274 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6275 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6276
6277 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6278 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6279 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6280 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6281
6282 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6283 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6284 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6285 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6286
6287 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6288 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6289 allocation.
6290
6291 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6292 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6293
6294 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6295 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6296 following
6297 @smallexample
6298 @group
6299 SECTIONS
6300 @{
6301 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6302 @{ *(.text) @}
6303 @}
6304 @end group
6305 @end smallexample
6306 @noindent
6307 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6308 address}.
6309
6310 @node Expression Section
6311 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6312 @cindex expression sections
6313 @cindex absolute expressions
6314 @cindex relative expressions
6315 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6316 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6317 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6318 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6319 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6320 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6321 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6322 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6323 operations.
6324
6325 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6326 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6327 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6328 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6329 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6330 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6331 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6332 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6333 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6334 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6335 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6336 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6337 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6338 everywhere.
6339
6340 In the following simple example,
6341
6342 @smallexample
6343 @group
6344 SECTIONS
6345 @{
6346 . = 0x100;
6347 __executable_start = 0x100;
6348 .data :
6349 @{
6350 . = 0x10;
6351 __data_start = 0x10;
6352 *(.data)
6353 @}
6354 @dots{}
6355 @}
6356 @end group
6357 @end smallexample
6358
6359 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6360 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6361 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6362 section in the second two assignments.
6363
6364 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6365 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6366
6367 @itemize @bullet
6368 @item
6369 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6370 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6371 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6372 @item
6373 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6374 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6375 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6376 @item
6377 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6378 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6379 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6380 before applying the operator.
6381 @end itemize
6382
6383 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6384
6385 @itemize @bullet
6386 @item
6387 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6388 @item
6389 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6390 @item
6391 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6392 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6393 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6394 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6395 but an absolute address otherwise.
6396 @item
6397 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6398 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6399 section as the relative operand(s).
6400 @item
6401 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6402 conversions) is an absolute address.
6403 @end itemize
6404
6405 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6406 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6407 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6408 section @samp{.data}:
6409 @smallexample
6410 SECTIONS
6411 @{
6412 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6413 @}
6414 @end smallexample
6415 @noindent
6416 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6417 @samp{.data} section.
6418
6419 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6420 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6421
6422 @node Builtin Functions
6423 @subsection Builtin Functions
6424 @cindex functions in expressions
6425 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6426 use in linker script expressions.
6427
6428 @table @code
6429 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6430 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6431 @cindex expression, absolute
6432 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6433 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6434 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6435 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6436
6437 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6438 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6439 @cindex section address in expression
6440 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6441 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6442 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6443 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6444 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6445 the other two will be absolute:
6446 @smallexample
6447 @group
6448 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6449 .output1 :
6450 @{
6451 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6452 @dots{}
6453 @}
6454 .output :
6455 @{
6456 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6457 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6458 @}
6459 @dots{} @}
6460 @end group
6461 @end smallexample
6462
6463 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6464 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6465 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6466 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6467 @cindex round up location counter
6468 @cindex align location counter
6469 @cindex round up expression
6470 @cindex align expression
6471 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6472 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6473 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6474 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6475 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6476 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6477
6478 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6479 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6480 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6481 input sections:
6482 @smallexample
6483 @group
6484 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6485 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6486 *(.data)
6487 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6488 @}
6489 @dots{} @}
6490 @end group
6491 @end smallexample
6492 @noindent
6493 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6494 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6495 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6496 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6497
6498 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6499
6500 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6501 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6502 @cindex section alignment
6503 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6504 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6505 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6506 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6507 value in that section.
6508 @smallexample
6509 @group
6510 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6511 .output @{
6512 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6513 @dots{}
6514 @}
6515 @dots{} @}
6516 @end group
6517 @end smallexample
6518
6519 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6520 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6521 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6522 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6523 section.
6524
6525 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6526 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6527 This is equivalent to either
6528 @smallexample
6529 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6530 @end smallexample
6531 or
6532 @smallexample
6533 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6534 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6535 @end smallexample
6536 @noindent
6537 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6538 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6539 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6540 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6541 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6542 bytes in the on-disk file.
6543
6544 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6545 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6546 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6547 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6548 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6549 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6550 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6551
6552 @noindent
6553 Example:
6554 @smallexample
6555 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6556 @end smallexample
6557
6558 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6559 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6560 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6561 evaluation purposes.
6562
6563 @smallexample
6564 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6565 @end smallexample
6566
6567 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6568 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6569 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6570 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6571 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6572 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6573 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6574 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6575 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6576 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6577 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6578 section alignment.
6579
6580 @smallexample
6581 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6582 @end smallexample
6583
6584 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6585 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6586 @cindex symbol defaults
6587 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6588 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6589 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6590 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6591 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6592 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6593 existed, its value is preserved:
6594
6595 @smallexample
6596 @group
6597 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6598 .text : @{
6599 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6600 @dots{}
6601 @}
6602 @dots{}
6603 @}
6604 @end group
6605 @end smallexample
6606
6607 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6608 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6609 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6610
6611 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6612 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6613 @cindex section load address in expression
6614 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6615 Section LMA}).
6616
6617 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6618 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6619 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6620 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6621
6622 @kindex MAX
6623 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6624 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6625
6626 @kindex MIN
6627 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6628 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6629
6630 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6631 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6632 @cindex unallocated address, next
6633 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6634 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6635 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6636 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6637
6638 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6639 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6640 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6641
6642 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6643 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6644 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6645 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6646 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6647 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6648 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6649 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6650 name.
6651
6652 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6653 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6654 @cindex section size
6655 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6656 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6657 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6658 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6659 @smallexample
6660 @group
6661 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6662 .output @{
6663 .start = . ;
6664 @dots{}
6665 .end = . ;
6666 @}
6667 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6668 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6669 @dots{} @}
6670 @end group
6671 @end smallexample
6672
6673 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6674 @itemx sizeof_headers
6675 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6676 @cindex header size
6677 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6678 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6679 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6680 choose, to facilitate paging.
6681
6682 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6683 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6684 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6685 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6686 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6687 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6688 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6689 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6690 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6691 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6692 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6693 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6694 @end table
6695
6696 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6697 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6698 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6699 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6700 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6701 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6702 linker will report an error.
6703
6704 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6705
6706 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6707 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6708 commands.
6709
6710 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6711 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6712 read. This can affect archive searching.
6713
6714 @ifset GENERIC
6715 @node Machine Dependent
6716 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6717
6718 @cindex machine dependencies
6719 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6720 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6721 functionality are not listed.
6722
6723 @menu
6724 @ifset H8300
6725 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6726 @end ifset
6727 @ifset M68HC11
6728 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6729 @end ifset
6730 @ifset ARM
6731 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6732 @end ifset
6733 @ifset HPPA
6734 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6735 @end ifset
6736 @ifset M68K
6737 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6738 @end ifset
6739 @ifset MIPS
6740 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6741 @end ifset
6742 @ifset MMIX
6743 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6744 @end ifset
6745 @ifset MSP430
6746 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6747 @end ifset
6748 @ifset NDS32
6749 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6750 @end ifset
6751 @ifset NIOSII
6752 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6753 @end ifset
6754 @ifset POWERPC
6755 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6756 @end ifset
6757 @ifset POWERPC64
6758 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6759 @end ifset
6760 @ifset S/390
6761 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6762 @end ifset
6763 @ifset SPU
6764 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6765 @end ifset
6766 @ifset TICOFF
6767 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6768 @end ifset
6769 @ifset WIN32
6770 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6771 @end ifset
6772 @ifset XTENSA
6773 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6774 @end ifset
6775 @end menu
6776 @end ifset
6777
6778 @ifset H8300
6779 @ifclear GENERIC
6780 @raisesections
6781 @end ifclear
6782
6783 @node H8/300
6784 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6785
6786 @cindex H8/300 support
6787 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6788 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6789
6790 @table @emph
6791 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6792 @item relaxing address modes
6793 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6794 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6795 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6796 respectively.
6797
6798 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6799 @item synthesizing instructions
6800 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6801 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6802 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6803 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6804 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6805 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6806 top page of memory).
6807
6808 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6809 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6810 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6811 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6812 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6813 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6814 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6815
6816 @item bit manipulation instructions
6817 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6818 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6819 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6820 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6821 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6822 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6823 the top page of memory).
6824
6825 @item system control instructions
6826 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6827 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6828 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6829 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6830 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6831 the top page of memory).
6832 @end table
6833
6834 @ifclear GENERIC
6835 @lowersections
6836 @end ifclear
6837 @end ifset
6838
6839 @ifclear GENERIC
6840 @ifset Renesas
6841 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6842 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6843 @node Renesas
6844 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6845
6846 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6847 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6848 options are required for these chips.
6849 @end ifset
6850 @end ifclear
6851
6852 @ifset ARM
6853 @ifclear GENERIC
6854 @raisesections
6855 @end ifclear
6856
6857 @ifset M68HC11
6858 @ifclear GENERIC
6859 @raisesections
6860 @end ifclear
6861
6862 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6863 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6864
6865 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6866
6867 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6868
6869 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6870 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6871
6872 @table @emph
6873 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6874 @item relaxing address modes
6875 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6876 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6877 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6878 respectively.
6879
6880 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6881 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6882 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6883
6884 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6885 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6886 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6887 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6888 @code{bset} instructions.
6889
6890 @end table
6891
6892 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6893
6894 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6895 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6896 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6897 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6898 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6899 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6900 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6901 point to the function trampoline.
6902
6903 @ifclear GENERIC
6904 @lowersections
6905 @end ifclear
6906 @end ifset
6907
6908 @node ARM
6909 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6910
6911 @cindex ARM interworking support
6912 @kindex --support-old-code
6913 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6914 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6915 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6916 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6917 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6918 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6919 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6920 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6921 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6922 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6923
6924 @cindex thumb entry point
6925 @cindex entry point, thumb
6926 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6927 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6928 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6929 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6930 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6931 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6932
6933 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6934 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6935 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6936 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6937 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6938 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6939
6940 @cindex BE8
6941 @kindex --be8
6942 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6943 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6944 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6945 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6946 little-endian code.
6947
6948 @cindex TARGET1
6949 @kindex --target1-rel
6950 @kindex --target1-abs
6951 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6952 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6953 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6954 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6955
6956 @cindex TARGET2
6957 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6958 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6959 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6960 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6961 @table @samp
6962 @item rel
6963 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6964 @item abs
6965 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6966 @item got-rel
6967 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6968 @end table
6969
6970 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6971 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6972 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6973 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6974 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6975 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6976
6977 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6978 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6979 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6980
6981 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6982 relocations are ignored.
6983
6984 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6985 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6986 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6987 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6988
6989 @smallexample
6990 TST rM, #1
6991 MOVEQ PC, rM
6992 BX Rn
6993 @end smallexample
6994
6995 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6996 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6997 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6998
6999 @cindex USE_BLX
7000 @kindex --use-blx
7001 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7002 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7003 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7004 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7005 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7006
7007 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7008 specify it if you are using that target.
7009
7010 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7011 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7012 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7013 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7014 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7015 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7016 the support code can read the intended values.
7017
7018 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7019 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7020 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7021 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7022 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7023 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
7025 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7026 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7027 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7028 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7029 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7030 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7031
7032 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7033 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7034 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7035 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7036 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7037 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7038 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7039
7040 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7041 @kindex --fix-arm1176
7042 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7043 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7044 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7045 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7046 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7047
7048 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7049 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7050 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7051
7052 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7053 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7054
7055 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7056 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7057 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7058 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7059 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7060 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7061 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7062 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7063
7064 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7065 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7066
7067 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7068 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7069 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7070 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7071 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7072
7073 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7074 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7075 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7076 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7077 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7078 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7079
7080 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7081 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7082
7083 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7084 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7085 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7086 occurs.
7087
7088 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7089 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7090 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7091 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7092 occurs.
7093
7094 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7095 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7096 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7097 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7098 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7099 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7100 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7101 not be diagnosed.
7102
7103 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7104 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7105 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7106 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7107 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7108 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7109 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7110
7111 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7112 @kindex --pic-veneer
7113 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7114 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7115 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7116 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7117
7118 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7119 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7120 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7121 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7122 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7123 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7124 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7125 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7126 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7127 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7128 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7129 where they should be placed.
7130
7131 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7132 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7133 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7134 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7135 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7136 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7137 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7138 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7139 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7140 from the input sections.
7141
7142 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7143 @samp{N = +1}.
7144
7145 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7146 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7147 otherwise.
7148
7149 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7150 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7151 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7152 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7153
7154 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7155
7156 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7157 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7158 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7159 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7160
7161 Please contact ARM for further details.
7162
7163 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7164 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7165 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7166 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7167
7168 @kindex --long-plt
7169 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7170 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7171 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7172 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7173
7174 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7175 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7176 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7177 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7178
7179 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7180 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7181 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7182 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7183 veneers in memory.
7184
7185 @kindex --cmse-implib
7186 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7187 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7188 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7189 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7190 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7191
7192 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7193 @cindex Input import library
7194 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7195 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7196 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7197 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7198 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7199 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7200 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7201 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7202 specified.
7203
7204 @ifclear GENERIC
7205 @lowersections
7206 @end ifclear
7207 @end ifset
7208
7209 @ifset HPPA
7210 @ifclear GENERIC
7211 @raisesections
7212 @end ifclear
7213
7214 @node HPPA ELF32
7215 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7216 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7217 @kindex --multi-subspace
7218 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7219 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7220 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7221 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7222 multiple sub-spaces.
7223
7224 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7225 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7226 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7227 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7228 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7229 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7230 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7231 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7232 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7233 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7234 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7235 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7236 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7237 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7238 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7239 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7240
7241 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7242 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7243 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7244 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7245
7246 @ifclear GENERIC
7247 @lowersections
7248 @end ifclear
7249 @end ifset
7250
7251 @ifset M68K
7252 @ifclear GENERIC
7253 @raisesections
7254 @end ifclear
7255
7256 @node M68K
7257 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7258
7259 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7260 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7261 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7262 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7263 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7264 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7265 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7266 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7267 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7268 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7269 support such GOTs.
7270 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7271 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7272 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7273 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7274
7275 @ifclear GENERIC
7276 @lowersections
7277 @end ifclear
7278 @end ifset
7279
7280 @ifset MIPS
7281 @ifclear GENERIC
7282 @raisesections
7283 @end ifclear
7284
7285 @node MIPS
7286 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7287
7288 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7289 @kindex --insn32
7290 @kindex --no-insn32
7291 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7292 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7293 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7294 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7295 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7296 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7297
7298 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7299 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7300 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7301 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7302 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7303 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7304 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7305 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7306 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7307 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7308 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7309 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7310
7311 @ifclear GENERIC
7312 @lowersections
7313 @end ifclear
7314 @end ifset
7315
7316 @ifset MMIX
7317 @ifclear GENERIC
7318 @raisesections
7319 @end ifclear
7320
7321 @node MMIX
7322 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7323 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7324 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7325 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7326 can translate between the two formats.
7327
7328 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7329 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7330 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7331 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7332 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7333 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7334 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7335 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7336
7337 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7338 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7339 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7340 of a section.
7341
7342 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7343 are left out from an mmo file.
7344
7345 @ifclear GENERIC
7346 @lowersections
7347 @end ifclear
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 @ifset MSP430
7351 @ifclear GENERIC
7352 @raisesections
7353 @end ifclear
7354
7355 @node MSP430
7356 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7357 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7358 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7359 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7360
7361 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7362 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7363
7364 @table @code
7365 @item @samp{.vectors}
7366 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7367
7368 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7369 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7370 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7371
7372 @item @samp{.infomem}
7373 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7374 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7375
7376 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7377 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7378 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7379
7380 @item @samp{.noinit}
7381 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7382
7383 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7384 @end table
7385
7386 @table @option
7387 @cindex MSP430 Options
7388 @kindex --code-region
7389 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7390 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7391 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7392 using this option.
7393
7394 @kindex --data-region
7395 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7396 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7397 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7398 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7399
7400 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7401 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7402 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7403 and @code{--data-region} options.
7404 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7405 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7406 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7407 @end table
7408
7409 @ifclear GENERIC
7410 @lowersections
7411 @end ifclear
7412 @end ifset
7413
7414 @ifset NDS32
7415 @ifclear GENERIC
7416 @raisesections
7417 @end ifclear
7418
7419 @node NDS32
7420 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7421 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7422 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7423 relaxes objects according to these options.
7424
7425 @table @code
7426 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7427 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7428
7429 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7430 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7431
7432 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7433 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7434
7435 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7436 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7437
7438 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7439 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7440
7441 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7442 Update the existing EX9 table.
7443
7444 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7445 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7446
7447 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7448 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7449
7450 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7451 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7452
7453 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7454 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7455 @end table
7456
7457 @ifclear GENERIC
7458 @lowersections
7459 @end ifclear
7460 @end ifset
7461
7462 @ifset NIOSII
7463 @ifclear GENERIC
7464 @raisesections
7465 @end ifclear
7466
7467 @node Nios II
7468 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7469 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7470 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7471
7472 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7473 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7474 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7475 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7476 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7477 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7478 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7479 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7480 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7481 larger than 256MB.
7482
7483 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7484 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7485 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7486 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7487 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7488 register as a temporary.
7489
7490 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7491 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7492 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7493
7494 @ifclear GENERIC
7495 @lowersections
7496 @end ifclear
7497 @end ifset
7498
7499 @ifset POWERPC
7500 @ifclear GENERIC
7501 @raisesections
7502 @end ifclear
7503
7504 @node PowerPC ELF32
7505 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7506 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7507 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7508 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7509 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7510 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7511 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7512 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7513 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7514 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7515 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7516 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7517 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7518
7519 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7520 @table @option
7521 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7522 @kindex --bss-plt
7523 @item --bss-plt
7524 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7525 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7526 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7527 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7528 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7529 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7530 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7531 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7532
7533 @kindex --secure-plt
7534 @item --secure-plt
7535 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7536 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7537 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7538 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7539 style BSS PLT.
7540
7541 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7542 @kindex --sdata-got
7543 @item --sdata-got
7544 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7545 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7546 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7547 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7548 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7549 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7550 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7551 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7552 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7553 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7554 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7555 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7556
7557 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7558 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7559 @item --emit-stub-syms
7560 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7561 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7562
7563 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7564 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7565 @item --no-tls-optimize
7566 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7567 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7568 disable the optimization.
7569 @end table
7570
7571 @ifclear GENERIC
7572 @lowersections
7573 @end ifclear
7574 @end ifset
7575
7576 @ifset POWERPC64
7577 @ifclear GENERIC
7578 @raisesections
7579 @end ifclear
7580
7581 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7582 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7583
7584 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7585 @table @option
7586 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7587 @kindex --stub-group-size
7588 @item --stub-group-size
7589 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7590 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7591 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7592 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7593 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7594 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7595 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7596 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7597 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7598 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7599 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7600 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7601 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7602 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7603
7604 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7605 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7606 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7607 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7608
7609 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7610 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7611 @item --emit-stub-syms
7612 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7613 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7614
7615 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7616 @kindex --dotsyms
7617 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7618 @item --dotsyms
7619 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7620 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7621 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7622 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7623 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7624 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7625 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7626 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7627 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7628 feature.
7629
7630 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7631 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7632 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7633 @item --save-restore-funcs
7634 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7635 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7636 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7637 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7638 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7639 link.
7640
7641 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7642 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7643 @item --no-tls-optimize
7644 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7645 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7646 disable the optimization.
7647
7648 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7649 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7650 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7651 @kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7652 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7653 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7654 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7655 These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7656 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7657 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7658 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7659 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7660 generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7661 __tls_get_addr_opt.
7662 Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7663 much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7664 an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7665 will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7666 @option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7667 and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7668 this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7669 Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7670 @option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7671 register saves.
7672
7673 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7674 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7675 @item --no-opd-optimize
7676 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7677 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7678 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7679 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7680
7681 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7682 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7683 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7684 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7685 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7686 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7687 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7688
7689 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7690 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7691 @item --no-toc-optimize
7692 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7693 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7694 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7695 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7696 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7697 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7698 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7699 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7700 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7701 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7702 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7703 optimization.
7704
7705 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7706 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7707 @item --no-multi-toc
7708 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7709 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7710 where TOC
7711 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7712 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7713 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7714 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7715 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7716 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7717 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7718 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7719
7720 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7721 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7722 @item --no-toc-sort
7723 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7724 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7725 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7726 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7727 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7728 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7729 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7730 off this feature.
7731
7732 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7733 @kindex --plt-align
7734 @kindex --no-plt-align
7735 @item --plt-align
7736 @itemx --no-plt-align
7737 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7738 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7739 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7740 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7741 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7742 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7743 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7744
7745 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7746 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7747 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7748 @item --plt-static-chain
7749 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7750 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7751 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7752 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7753
7754 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7755 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7756 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7757 @item --plt-thread-safe
7758 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7759 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7760 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7761 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7762 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7763 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7764 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7765 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7766 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7767 default behaviour.
7768
7769 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7770 @kindex --plt-localentry
7771 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7772 @item --plt-localentry
7773 @itemx --no-localentry
7774 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7775 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7776 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7777 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7778 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7779 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7780 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7781 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7782 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7783 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7784 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7785 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7786 @end table
7787
7788 @ifclear GENERIC
7789 @lowersections
7790 @end ifclear
7791 @end ifset
7792
7793 @ifset S/390
7794 @ifclear GENERIC
7795 @raisesections
7796 @end ifclear
7797
7798 @node S/390 ELF
7799 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7800
7801 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7802 @table @option
7803
7804 @cindex S/390
7805 @kindex --s390-pgste
7806 @item --s390-pgste
7807 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7808 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7809 binaries marked that way.
7810 @end table
7811
7812 @ifclear GENERIC
7813 @lowersections
7814 @end ifclear
7815 @end ifset
7816
7817 @ifset SPU
7818 @ifclear GENERIC
7819 @raisesections
7820 @end ifclear
7821
7822 @node SPU ELF
7823 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7824
7825 @cindex SPU ELF options
7826 @table @option
7827
7828 @cindex SPU plugins
7829 @kindex --plugin
7830 @item --plugin
7831 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7832
7833 @cindex SPU overlays
7834 @kindex --no-overlays
7835 @item --no-overlays
7836 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7837 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7838 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7839 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7840
7841 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7842 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7843 @item --emit-stub-syms
7844 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7845 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7846
7847 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7848 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7849 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7850 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7851 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7852 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7853
7854 @cindex SPU local store size
7855 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7856 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7857 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7858 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7859 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7860
7861 @cindex SPU
7862 @kindex --stack-analysis
7863 @item --stack-analysis
7864 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7865 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7866 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7867 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7868 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7869 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7870 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7871 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7872 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7873 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7874 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7875 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7876 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7877 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7878 and calls will be given.
7879
7880 @cindex SPU
7881 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7882 @item --emit-stack-syms
7883 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7884 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7885 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7886 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7887 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7888 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7889 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7890 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7891 @end table
7892
7893 @ifclear GENERIC
7894 @lowersections
7895 @end ifclear
7896 @end ifset
7897
7898 @ifset TICOFF
7899 @ifclear GENERIC
7900 @raisesections
7901 @end ifclear
7902
7903 @node TI COFF
7904 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7905 @cindex TI COFF versions
7906 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7907 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7908 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7909 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7910 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7911 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7912
7913 @ifclear GENERIC
7914 @lowersections
7915 @end ifclear
7916 @end ifset
7917
7918 @ifset WIN32
7919 @ifclear GENERIC
7920 @raisesections
7921 @end ifclear
7922
7923 @node WIN32
7924 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7925
7926 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7927 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7928 command-line options mentioned here.
7929
7930 @table @emph
7931 @cindex import libraries
7932 @item import libraries
7933 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7934 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7935 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7936 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7937 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7938 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7939
7940 @item exporting DLL symbols
7941 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7942 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7943
7944 @table @emph
7945 @item using auto-export functionality
7946 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7947 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7948 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7949
7950 @itemize
7951 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7952 @item --exclude-symbols
7953 @item --exclude-libs
7954 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7955 @item --version-script
7956 @end itemize
7957
7958 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7959 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7960 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7961 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7962 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7963 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7964 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7965 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7966
7967 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7968 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7969 if either of the following are true:
7970
7971 @itemize
7972 @item A DEF file is used.
7973 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7974 @end itemize
7975
7976 @item using a DEF file
7977 @cindex using a DEF file
7978 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7979 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7980 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7981 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7982 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7983
7984 @example
7985 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7986 @end example
7987
7988 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7989 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7990
7991 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7992
7993 @example
7994 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7995
7996 EXPORTS
7997 foo
7998 bar
7999 _bar = bar
8000 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8001 var1 DATA
8002 doo = foo == foo2
8003 eoo DATA == var1
8004 @end example
8005
8006 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8007 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8008 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8009 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8010 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8011 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8012 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8013 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8014 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8015
8016 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8017 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8018 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8019
8020 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8021 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8022 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8023 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8024
8025 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8026 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8027 non-default base address for the image.
8028
8029 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8030 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8031 filename specified on the command line.
8032
8033 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8034
8035 @example
8036 EXPORTS
8037 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8038 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8039 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8040 @end example
8041
8042 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8043 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8044 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8045 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8046 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8047 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8048 string in import/export table for the symbol.
8049
8050 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8051
8052 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8053 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8054 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8055 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8056 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8057
8058 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8059 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8060 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8061 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8062
8063 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8064 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8065 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8066 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8067 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8068 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8069 application will behave unexpectedly.
8070
8071 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8072 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8073 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8074 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8075 the DLL without an import library.
8076
8077 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8078 other DEF file statements
8079
8080 @cindex creating a DEF file
8081 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8082 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8083
8084 @item Using decorations
8085 @cindex Using decorations
8086 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8087 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8088 declared as:
8089
8090 @example
8091 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8092 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8093 @end example
8094
8095 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8096 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8097 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8098 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8099
8100 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8101 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8102 instead:
8103
8104 @example
8105 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8106 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8107 @end example
8108
8109 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8110 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8111 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8112 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8113 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8114 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8115 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8116 information.
8117 @end table
8118
8119 @cindex automatic data imports
8120 @item automatic data imports
8121 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8122 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8123 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8124 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8125 code to these platforms, especially for large
8126 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8127 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8128 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8129 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8130 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8131 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8132 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8133 trigger the feature's use.
8134
8135 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8136 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8137
8138 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8139 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8140
8141 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8142 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8143 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8144 below.
8145
8146 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8147 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8148 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8149 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8150 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8151 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8152 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8153 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8154 references.
8155
8156 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8157 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8158 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8159 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8160 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8161 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8162 run without error on an older system.
8163
8164 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8165 enabled as needed.
8166
8167 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8168 @item direct linking to a dll
8169 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8170 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8171 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8172 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8173 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8174 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8175 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8176 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8177 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8178 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8179
8180 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8181 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8182 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8183 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8184 select the dll instead of an import library.
8185
8186
8187 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8188 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8189
8190 @example
8191 libxxx.dll.a
8192 xxx.dll.a
8193 libxxx.a
8194 xxx.lib
8195 libxxx.lib
8196 cygxxx.dll (*)
8197 libxxx.dll
8198 xxx.dll
8199 @end example
8200
8201 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8202
8203 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8204 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8205 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8206 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8207 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8208
8209 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8210 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8211 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8212 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8213 could coexist on the same machine.
8214
8215 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8216 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8217 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8218
8219 @example
8220 bin/
8221 cygxxx.dll
8222 lib/
8223 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8224 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8225 @end example
8226
8227 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8228 done two ways:
8229
8230 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8231 @example
8232 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8233 @end example
8234
8235 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8236 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8237 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8238 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8239
8240 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8241 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8242 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8243 making the app/dll.
8244
8245 @example
8246 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8247 @end example
8248
8249 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8250
8251 @example
8252 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8253 @end example
8254
8255 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8256 perfectly legal
8257
8258 @example
8259 bin/
8260 cygxxx-5.dll
8261 lib/
8262 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8263 @end example
8264
8265 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8266 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8267 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8268
8269 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8270 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8271
8272 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8273 work with auto-imported data.
8274
8275 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8276 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8277 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8278 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8279 possible to do this without an import lib.
8280
8281 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8282 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8283 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8284 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8285
8286 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8287 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8288 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8289 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8290 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8291 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8292 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8293
8294 @item symbol aliasing
8295 @table @emph
8296 @item adding additional names
8297 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8298 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8299 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8300 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8301 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8302
8303 @example
8304 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8305
8306 EXPORTS
8307 foo
8308 _foo = foo
8309 @end example
8310
8311 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8312
8313 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8314 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8315
8316 @example
8317 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8318 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8319 @end example
8320
8321 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8322 symbols.
8323
8324 @item renaming symbols
8325 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8326 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8327 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8328 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8329 created). In the following example:
8330
8331 @example
8332 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8333
8334 EXPORTS
8335 _foo = foo
8336 @end example
8337
8338 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8339 @samp{_foo}.
8340 @end table
8341
8342 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8343 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8344 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8345 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8346 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8347 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8348 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8349 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8350 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8351 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8352 which is probably not what you wanted.
8353
8354 @cindex weak externals
8355 @item weak externals
8356 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8357 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8358 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8359 are three variants of weak externals:
8360 @itemize
8361 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8362 called lazy externals.
8363 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8364 This form is not presently implemented.
8365 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8366 implemented.
8367 @end itemize
8368 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8369 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8370 uses a default value.
8371
8372 @cindex aligned common symbols
8373 @item aligned common symbols
8374 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8375 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8376 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8377 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8378 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8379 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8380 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8381 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8382
8383 @end table
8384
8385 @ifclear GENERIC
8386 @lowersections
8387 @end ifclear
8388 @end ifset
8389
8390 @ifset XTENSA
8391 @ifclear GENERIC
8392 @raisesections
8393 @end ifclear
8394
8395 @node Xtensa
8396 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8397
8398 @cindex Xtensa processors
8399 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8400 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8401 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8402 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8403 example, with the command:
8404
8405 @smallexample
8406 SECTIONS
8407 @{
8408 .text : @{
8409 *(.literal .text)
8410 @}
8411 @}
8412 @end smallexample
8413
8414 @noindent
8415 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8416 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8417 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8418 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8419 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8420 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8421 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8422
8423 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8424 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8425 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8426 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8427 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8428 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8429 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8430 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8431 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8432 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8433 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8434 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8435
8436 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8437 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8438 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8439 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8440 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8441 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8442 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8443 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8444 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8445 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8446 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8447 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8448 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8449 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8450
8451 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8452 control the linker:
8453
8454 @cindex Xtensa options
8455 @table @option
8456 @item --size-opt
8457 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8458 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8459 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8460 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8461 preserve the correctness of the code.
8462 @end table
8463
8464 @ifclear GENERIC
8465 @lowersections
8466 @end ifclear
8467 @end ifset
8468
8469 @ifclear SingleFormat
8470 @node BFD
8471 @chapter BFD
8472
8473 @cindex back end
8474 @cindex object file management
8475 @cindex object formats available
8476 @kindex objdump -i
8477 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8478 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8479 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8480 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8481 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8482 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8483 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8484 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8485 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8486
8487 @cindex BFD requirements
8488 @cindex requirements for BFD
8489 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8490 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8491 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8492 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8493 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8494 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8495 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8496
8497 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8498 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8499 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8500 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8501
8502 @menu
8503 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8504 @end menu
8505
8506 @node BFD outline
8507 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8508 @cindex opening object files
8509 @include bfdsumm.texi
8510 @end ifclear
8511
8512 @node Reporting Bugs
8513 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8514 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8515 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8516
8517 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8518
8519 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8520 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8521 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8522 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8523 @command{ld}.
8524
8525 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8526 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8527
8528 @menu
8529 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8530 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8531 @end menu
8532
8533 @node Bug Criteria
8534 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8535 @cindex bug criteria
8536
8537 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8538
8539 @itemize @bullet
8540 @cindex fatal signal
8541 @cindex linker crash
8542 @cindex crash of linker
8543 @item
8544 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8545 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8546
8547 @cindex error on valid input
8548 @item
8549 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8550
8551 @cindex invalid input
8552 @item
8553 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8554 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8555 object files are correct.
8556
8557 @item
8558 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8559 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8560 @end itemize
8561
8562 @node Bug Reporting
8563 @section How to Report Bugs
8564 @cindex bug reports
8565 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8566
8567 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8568 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8569 recommend you contact that organization first.
8570
8571 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8572 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8573 distribution.
8574
8575 @ifset BUGURL
8576 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8577 @value{BUGURL}.
8578 @end ifset
8579
8580 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8581 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8582 fact or leave it out, state it!
8583
8584 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8585 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8586 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8587 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8588 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8589 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8590 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8591 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8592 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8593 and the most helpful.
8594
8595 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8596 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8597 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8598
8599 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8600 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8601 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8602 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8603
8604 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8605
8606 @itemize @bullet
8607 @item
8608 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8609 the @samp{--version} argument.
8610
8611 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8612 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8613
8614 @item
8615 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8616 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8617
8618 @item
8619 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8620 version number.
8621
8622 @item
8623 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8624 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8625
8626 @item
8627 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8628 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8629 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8630 sufficient.
8631
8632 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8633 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8634
8635 @item
8636 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8637 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8638 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8639 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8640 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8641 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8642 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8643 attachments are best.
8644
8645 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8646 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8647 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8648 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8649 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8650
8651 @item
8652 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8653 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8654
8655 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8656 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8657 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8658 a chance to make a mistake.
8659
8660 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8661 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8662 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8663 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8664 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8665 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8666 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8667 any conclusion from our observations.
8668
8669 @item
8670 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8671 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8672 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8673 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8674 context, not by line number.
8675
8676 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8677 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8678 @end itemize
8679
8680 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8681
8682 @itemize @bullet
8683 @item
8684 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8685
8686 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8687 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8688 changes will not affect it.
8689
8690 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8691 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8692 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8693 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8694
8695 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8696 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8697 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8698 less time, and so on.
8699
8700 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8701 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8702
8703 @item
8704 A patch for the bug.
8705
8706 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8707 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8708 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8709 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8710
8711 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8712 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8713 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8714 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8715 fixed.
8716
8717 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8718 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8719 help us to understand.
8720
8721 @item
8722 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8723
8724 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8725 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8726 @end itemize
8727
8728 @node MRI
8729 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8730 @cindex MRI compatibility
8731 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8732 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8733 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8734 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8735 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8736 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8737 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8738
8739 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8740 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8741 features to make use of them.
8742
8743 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8744 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8745
8746 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8747 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8748 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8749 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8750 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8751
8752 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8753
8754 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8755 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8756 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8757
8758 @table @code
8759 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8760 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8761 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8762 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8763 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8764 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8765 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8766 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8767 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8768 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8769 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8770
8771 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8772 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8773 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8774 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8775
8776 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8777
8778 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8779 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8780 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8781 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8782
8783 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8784 @item BASE @var{expression}
8785 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8786 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8787
8788 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8789 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8790 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8791 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8792
8793 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8794 @item END
8795 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8796
8797 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8798 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8799 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8800 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8801
8802 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8803 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8804 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8805 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8806
8807 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8808 same line, with no change in its effect.
8809
8810 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8811 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8812 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8813 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8814 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8815 command line.
8816
8817 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8818 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8819 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8820 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8821 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8822
8823 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8824 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8825 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8826 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8827 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8828 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8829 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8830 file, in the order specified.
8831
8832 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8833 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8834 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8835 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8836 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8837 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8838
8839 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8840 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8841 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8842 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8843 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8844 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8845 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8846 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8847 @end table
8848
8849 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8850 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8851 @include fdl.texi
8852
8853 @node LD Index
8854 @unnumbered LD Index
8855
8856 @printindex cp
8857
8858 @tex
8859 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8860 % meantime:
8861 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8862 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8863 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8864 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8865 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8866 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8867 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8868 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8869 \page\colophon
8870 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8871 @end tex
8872
8873 @bye
This page took 0.278947 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.